Model 6 Motor Control Centers - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

Model 6 Motor Control Centers Catalog Class 8998 03 CONTENTS Description Page Product Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Application and General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Technical Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents Section 1—Product Description .............................................................................................................9 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................9 Features...........................................................................................................................................10 Codes and Standards ......................................................................................................................11 NEMA/EEMAC Wiring Classes and Types ......................................................................................11 Class 1- Independent Units..........................................................................................................11 Class 2 - Interconnected Units.....................................................................................................11 Type A..........................................................................................................................................11 Type B..........................................................................................................................................11 Type B-D......................................................................................................................................11 Type B-T ......................................................................................................................................11 Type C .........................................................................................................................................11 Enclosure Types ..............................................................................................................................12 NEMA 1........................................................................................................................................12 NEMA 1 Gasketed (NEMA 1A) ....................................................................................................12 NEMA 3R .....................................................................................................................................12 NEMA 12......................................................................................................................................12 Shipping Weights .............................................................................................................................12 Altitude Ratings................................................................................................................................12 Motor Control Center Heat Dissipation ............................................................................................13 Structure Steel Gauge Information ..................................................................................................13 Section 2—Application and General Information .................................................................................15 Structures and Bussing....................................................................................................................15 Structure ......................................................................................................................................15 Bussing Options and Modifications..............................................................................................15 Structure Options and Modifications ............................................................................................16 Special Structures ........................................................................................................................16 Model 5 to Model 6 Transition Section.........................................................................................17 Switchboard to Model 6 Transition Section..................................................................................17 Bus Duct Connection ...................................................................................................................17 Model 4 to Model 6 Transition Section.........................................................................................18 Incoming Devices.............................................................................................................................19 Main Lug Compartments..............................................................................................................19 Main Circuit Breakers...................................................................................................................20 Main Fusible Switches .................................................................................................................21 Standard Wire Lug Ranges (Mechanical) ....................................................................................22 Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral ...................................................23 Four-Wire Examples ....................................................................................................................24 PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor ........................................................................................................25 PowerLogic Power Meter.............................................................................................................26 PowerLogic Ethernet Gateways...................................................................................................28 Ethernet Hubs ..............................................................................................................................28 Transparent Ready™ Factory Configurations .............................................................................29 Analog Metering Options On Mains .............................................................................................29 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) Units for MCC Incoming Mains ............................30 Model IMA TVSS (120kA Surge Rating) ......................................................................................33 Model IMA TVSS (160kA Surge Rating) ......................................................................................33 Model IMA TVSS (240kA Surge Rating) ......................................................................................33 Additional Options ........................................................................................................................33 Branch Feeder Units ........................................................................................................................34 Circuit Breaker Branch Feeder Units ...........................................................................................34 Fusible Switch Branch Feeder Units............................................................................................35 Combination Starter Units................................................................................................................36 Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers ........................36 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers ...........................................37 Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers....... 37 Full Voltage Reversing (FVR) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers...................................38 Full Voltage Reversing Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers ...................................................38 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 3 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers.......39 ProductStarters Description Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers.....40 Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers .................................40 Reduced Voltage 2-Step Part-winding (RVPW) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers ........41 Full Voltage 2-Speed 1-Winding Starters (Consequent Pole) with Mag-Gard Circuit Breakers...41 Full Voltage 2-Speed 2-Winding Starters (Separate Winding) with Mag-Gard Circuit Breakers..42 Full Voltage 2-Speed Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers ...................................................42 Wye-Delta Closed Transition Starters with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers (Non-UL Listed)43 Wye-Delta Open Transition Starters with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers (Non-UL Listed) ..44 Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects ..........................45 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects .........................45 Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Non-reversing with Fusible Disconnects ...........................46 Full Voltage Reversing (FVR) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects.....................................46 Full Voltage Reversing Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects .................................47 Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Reversing with Fusible Disconnects..............47 Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects ................48 Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects ...............48 Reduced Voltage 2-step Part-winding (RVPW) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed) .......................................................................................................................48 Full Voltage 2-Speed 1-Winding Starters (Consequent Pole) with Fusible Switch Disconnects..49 Full Voltage 2-Speed 2-Winding Starters (Separate Winding) with Fusible Switch Disconnects.49 Full Voltage 2-Speed Reversing Starters .....................................................................................49 Wye-Delta Closed Transition Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed) ...........50 Wye-Delta Open Transition Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed)..............50 Unit Options .....................................................................................................................................51 Unit Nameplates...........................................................................................................................51 Control Circuit Variations..............................................................................................................51 Pilot Devices.................................................................................................................................52 Pilot Lights....................................................................................................................................53 LED Pilot Lights............................................................................................................................54 Overload Relays...........................................................................................................................55 Motor Logic® Solid State Overload Relays (SSOLR) ..................................................................56 Overload Trip Function.................................................................................................................56 Phase Loss / Phase Unbalance Relays .......................................................................................56 Motor Logic Plus Solid State Overload Relays.............................................................................57 Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks ¿ ................................................................................................................................... 58 Circuit Breaker Options ................................................................................................................58 Fusible Switch Options.................................................................................................................59 Ground Fault Options ...................................................................................................................59 Wiring Options..............................................................................................................................60 Miscellaneous Units .........................................................................................................................61 Distribution Transformers .............................................................................................................61 Single Phase Distribution Transformers 120 V or 240 V Secondary................................................61 Three-Phase Distribution Transformers 208Y/120 V Secondary ................................................62 Distribution Panelboards ..............................................................................................................62 Factory Installed Panelboard Branch Circuit Breakers.................................................................63 Empty Mounting Units ..................................................................................................................64 Full Section Empty Mounting Units (Relay Section).....................................................................64 Blank Cover Plates.......................................................................................................................64 Master Terminal Compartment For NEMA/EEMAC Class I or II, Type C ....................................64 Power Factor Correction Capacitors ............................................................................................65 Altivar® AC Drive Units in MCCs ......................................................................................................66 General Information......................................................................................................................66 Application....................................................................................................................................66 Variable Torque Loads .................................................................................................................66 Constant Torque Loads................................................................................................................67 Constant Horsepower Loads........................................................................................................67 Impact Loads................................................................................................................................68 Selection ......................................................................................................................................68 4 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drives...............................................................................................................69 MCC Package Features...............................................................................................................69 Factory Options............................................................................................................................70 Monitoring and Indication.............................................................................................................70 AC Drive Options .........................................................................................................................71 Drive Power Circuit ......................................................................................................................71 Space Requirements ...................................................................................................................72 Power Contactor Options .............................................................................................................74 Pilot Devices ................................................................................................................................75 Miscellaneous Options.................................................................................................................75 Wiring Diagrams ..........................................................................................................................77 Altistart® 48 Soft Start Units.............................................................................................................79 General Information .....................................................................................................................79 Benefits of Altistart 48 Soft Starts ................................................................................................79 MCC Packaging ...........................................................................................................................80 Features Included: .......................................................................................................................80 Starting and Stopping ..................................................................................................................82 Monitoring and Indication.............................................................................................................82 Options.........................................................................................................................................83 Application ...................................................................................................................................83 Standard Duty Application ...........................................................................................................83 Severe Duty Application...............................................................................................................83 Selecting the Starter ....................................................................................................................83 Standard Duty Altistart® 48 Soft Starts with Circuit Breaker Disconnects (Pumps, Fans, Lightly Loaded, or Unloaded Starting Applications) ........................................85 Standard Duty Altistart® 48 Soft Starts with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Pumps, Fans, Lightly Loaded, or Unloaded Starting Applications) ........................................86 Altistart® Unit Power Options ......................................................................................................88 Altistart Unit Control Circuit Variations .........................................................................................88 Altistart® Unit Control Options .....................................................................................................89 Automatic Transfer Switches with Microprocessor Control Panel ...................................................91 Standard Features .......................................................................................................................91 Model 6 OMNI Center ......................................................................................................................94 OMNI Basic ..................................................................................................................................94 Control Power Distribution ...........................................................................................................94 PLC Connections in the MCC ......................................................................................................94 Quantum™ PLC...........................................................................................................................95 Premium™ PLC ...........................................................................................................................95 Momentum™ PLC .......................................................................................................................95 Micro PLC ....................................................................................................................................96 Nano PLC ....................................................................................................................................96 Compact PLC...............................................................................................................................96 Twido™ Ultra-Compact PLC........................................................................................................96 Model 6 OMNI Center-Flex ..........................................................................................................97 Benefits ........................................................................................................................................97 Connectivity .................................................................................................................................97 OMNI Basic with Data Acquisition ...............................................................................................98 Features/Options .........................................................................................................................98 Model 6 OMNI Center-Enhanced.................................................................................................98 Information Available ...................................................................................................................98 Motor Logic® Plus Displays .........................................................................................................99 Motor Logic Plus Overload Central Monitoring Display ...............................................................99 Motor Logic Plus Motor Management System Display ................................................................99 Thermal Overload Relay Unit Selection.........................................................................................101 Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables for All Types of Combination Starter Units Except Part-Winding Starter Units ........................................................................................................101 Size 1 .........................................................................................................................................101 Size 2 .........................................................................................................................................102 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 5 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents Size 3 .........................................................................................................................................102 Product Description Size 4 .........................................................................................................................................102 Size 5 .........................................................................................................................................103 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Circuit Breakers................................................................103 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Fusible Switch Disconnects..............................................103 Size 6 .........................................................................................................................................103 Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables for Part Winding Combination Starter Units Only ..........104 Size 1 .........................................................................................................................................104 Size 2 .........................................................................................................................................104 Size 3 .........................................................................................................................................105 Size 4 .........................................................................................................................................105 Size 5 .........................................................................................................................................105 Size 5 with CT Overload with Circuit Breakers ..........................................................................106 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Fusible Switch Disconnects..............................................106 Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Relay Selection Tables for All Types of Combination Starter Units Except Part-Winding Starter Units .......................................................................107 Size 1 .........................................................................................................................................107 Size 2 .........................................................................................................................................107 Size 3 .........................................................................................................................................107 Size 4 .........................................................................................................................................108 Size 5 .........................................................................................................................................108 Size 6 .........................................................................................................................................108 Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Relay Selection Tables for Part Winding Combination Starter Units Only......................................................................................................................109 Size 1 .........................................................................................................................................109 Size 2 .........................................................................................................................................109 Size 3 .........................................................................................................................................109 Size 4 .........................................................................................................................................110 Size 5 .........................................................................................................................................110 Section 3—Technical Overview .........................................................................................................111 Short Circuit Current Ratings .........................................................................................................111 Interrupt Rating ..........................................................................................................................111 Bus Bracing or Withstand Rating ...............................................................................................111 Integrated Equipment Rating .....................................................................................................111 Series Connected Short Circuit Current Ratings .......................................................................111 Short Circuit Current Rating.......................................................................................................111 UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings .....................................................................................112 “Self-Certified” Short Circuit Current Ratings .............................................................................112 Section 4—Selection Guide ...............................................................................................................117 Layout Instructions.........................................................................................................................117 Unit Designation Chart for Planning .............................................................................................118 Section 5—Wiring Diagrams..............................................................................................................119 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................119 Submittal Drawing Cover Sheet.....................................................................................................119 Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer ...................................120 Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1–4 with Separate Source....................................................121 Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer ...........................................122 Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer (cont.) ................................123 Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer (cont.) ................................124 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control .....................................................................................................................125 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control .....................................................................................................................126 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks ................................................................................................................127 6 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks .........................................................................................................128 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks .....129 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks .....130 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer and Remote Control ..............................................................................................................131 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks .....132 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer, Remote Control, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks ...............133 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control....... 134 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary and Operator Interlocks 135 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Remote Control, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary and Operator Interlocks ......136 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer and Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons........................................................................................................137 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On” and Green “Off” Pilot Lights ....................................................138 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, and Red “On” and Green “Off” Pilot Lights.........................139 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights ...................................................................140 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3—4 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay.......141 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer and Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons........................................................................................................142 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights ..........................................................143 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights...............................144 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights..................................................................................145 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay .....................146 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay.................................................147 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay ..........148 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay.......149 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay .................................150 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay .....................151 Section 6—Dimensions......................................................................................................................153 General ..........................................................................................................................................153 Quick Finder for Conduit Entry Drawings.......................................................................................153 NEMA/EEMAC 1, NEMA/EEMAC 1 Gasketed, or NEMA/EEMAC 12 Enclosures ........................154 Standard Sections—15 in. Deep....................................................................................................156 Relay Sections—15 in. Deep .........................................................................................................157 Standard Sections — 20 in. Deep..................................................................................................158 Relay Sections—20 in. Deep .........................................................................................................160 Main/Branch Devices and Relay Sections—20 in. Deep ...............................................................161 Relay Sections—20 in. Deep/50 in. Wide ......................................................................................162 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 7 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Table of Contents Standard Sections—15 in. Deep....................................................................................................163 Product Description Relay Sections—15 in. Deep .........................................................................................................163 Standard Sections—20 in. Deep....................................................................................................164 Relay Sections—20 in. Deep .........................................................................................................165 Section 7—Typical Specifications......................................................................................................167 Regulatory Requirements ..............................................................................................................167 Packing and Shipping ....................................................................................................................167 Storage ..........................................................................................................................................167 Warranty ........................................................................................................................................167 Materials ........................................................................................................................................167 Structures.......................................................................................................................................167 Standard Paint ...............................................................................................................................168 Special Paint (Customer-Specified) ...............................................................................................168 Wireways .......................................................................................................................................168 Barriers ..........................................................................................................................................168 Bussing ..........................................................................................................................................169 Typical Unit Construction ...............................................................................................................169 Components...................................................................................................................................170 A. Combination Starters.............................................................................................................170 B. Control Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................170 C. Nameplates ...........................................................................................................................171 D. Pilot Device Panel .................................................................................................................171 Six-Inch Unit Construction .............................................................................................................171 Components for Six-Inch Units ......................................................................................................172 Six-Inch Combination Starters ...................................................................................................172 Terminal Blocks for Six-Inch Units .............................................................................................172 Nameplates ................................................................................................................................172 Pilot Device Control Panel .........................................................................................................172 Quality Control ...............................................................................................................................173 Physical Inspection ....................................................................................................................173 Electrical Tests...........................................................................................................................173 Markings/Labels.........................................................................................................................173 8 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Introduction Product Description SECTION 1—PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Introduction Motor control centers (MCCs) provide the most suitable method for grouping electrical motor control, automation, and power distribution in a compact and economical package. Motor control centers consist of totally enclosed, dead front, free-standing structures bolted together. These sections support and house control units, a common bus bar for distributing power to the control units, and a network of wire trough and conductor entrance areas for accommodating incoming and outgoing load and control wires. The control units consist of components such as combination motor starters, branch feeder devices, AC drives, soft starts, or lighting panelboards. Each unit is mounted in an individual, isolated compartment having its own door. Standard MCC dimensions are 20 in. wide (including a 4 in. vertical wireway trough) by 90 in. high (add 1.5 in. base channel and a 3 in. removable top lifting channel) by 15 or 20 in. deep. Larger sections are often required for mounting larger equipment, or for providing room for customermounted devices. Two package styles are available: Standard and Industrial. These Model 6 feature packages allow you to custom design the MCC to fit your specific requirements. The Standard package lets you tailor the MCC by selecting only those options that you need for an individual project, guaranteeing the optimal cost/value balance. The Industrial package includes options most often requested and specified by industrial customers. Offering the options as part of a package reduces the possibility of leaving out common industrial features. See the following table for a comparison of the two packages. Option Standard Package Industrial Package Vertical ground bus material Steel Copper Horizontal bus material Tin-plated aluminum ➀ Tin-plated copper Fishtape barriers Optional Included Gray White Structure Features Unit Features Interior color Nameplates Optional Included X1 and X2 wired to terminal blocks Optional Included ➀ Exceptions: 1600-2500 A are tin plated copper. All features of the industrial package can be added individually to the standard version. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 9 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Product Description Features Features Product Description • Section dimensions are 20 in. W x 90 in. H x 15 in. or 20 in. D. • Horizontal power bus is located at the top of the structure for easy installation, inspection, and maintenance without having to remove units. Quarter-Turn Fasteners • Constructed with 12-gauge steel frame and welded corner channels for exceptional structural rigidity. • A durable, ANSI 49 acrylic/alkyd baked enamel exterior finish is standard on all Model 6 MCCs. • Captive, four-bolt, horizontal splice bars with self-contained nuts and hardware make installation easy and reduce the possibility of splice bar loss. Captive Horizontal Splice Bars • Vertical bus barriers and wireway openings, when supplied, are built in 3 in. increments. This feature allows more flexibility when mounting units and reduces wasted space in the enclosure. • Vertical ground bus is located in each section. This bus mates with ground stabs on the rear of each plug-on unit to create a positive ground connection, with first make/last break operation. • Iridescent chromate-plated exterior hardware increases corrosion resistance. • Quarter-turn fasteners on unit and wireway doors expedite closing and opening. • A full-depth vertical wireway maximizes the wire pulling area. The Model 6 MCC has the largest vertical wireway in the industry. • L-shaped unit door hinge pins are easily removed with a screwdriver for general maintenance. Horizontal Bus Located Behind the Wireway • Each Industrial package unit is fully compartmentalized, with solid side, back, and bottom plates. This feature allows more mounting space for components and confines any potential faults within the individual unit. • A hinged, or fold-down, unit bottom plate on the Industrial package MCC allows additional space for wiring and maintenance. • Leveling notches in the base channel provide a means of aligning the section during installation. Iridescent Chromate Plated Exterior Hardware • Non-conductive, two-piece, sliding, horizontal bus barrier provides convenient access for splicing and maintenance without the need to remove the panels. Vertical Ground Bus L-shaped Hinge Pins 12-Gauge Steel Frame and Welded Corner Channels 10 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Codes and Standards Product Description Codes and Standards ® ® Model 6 Motor Control Centers are manufactured to NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association) Standard ICS 18-2001 and EEMAC (Electrical, Electronic Manufacturers’ Association of Canada) standards. Model 6 MCCs are also manufactured to Underwriters Laboratories Standard 845 and bear the “UL Listed” label, where applicable. The “UL Listed” mark is applied to vertical sections and units that are installed within those sections. It should be noted that sections and installed units are independently listed devices. Thus, it is possible to have non-UL Listed units installed in UL Listed vertical sections. All sections and units listed in this catalog are UL Listed, unless otherwise noted. The Model 6 MCC meets CSA (Canadian Standards Association) specification standards and can carry the CSA label. NEMA/EEMAC Wiring Classes and Types Class 1- Independent Units Class 1 motor control centers consist of mechanical groupings of combination motor control units, branch feeders, other units, and electrical devices arranged in a convenient assembly. The manufacturer completes wiring between components within each unit. Wiring between units is not required. Class 2 - Interconnected Units Class 2 MCCs are the same as Class 1 MCCs with the addition of manufacturer-furnished electrical interlocking and wiring between units as specifically described in the overall control system diagrams supplied by the purchaser. Type A User (field) wiring connects directly to device terminals internal to the unit. Type A wiring is provided only on Class 1 MCCs. Type B User (field) control wiring connects to unit terminal block(s) in or adjacent to each motor control unit. User load (power) wiring for Size 3 or smaller combination motor control units connects as follows: Type B-D User load (power) wiring connects directly to the device terminals, which are located immediately adjacent to, and are readily accessible from, the vertical wireway. Type B-T User load (power) wiring connects to factory-wired power terminal blocks located in or adjacent to each unit. User load (power) wiring for Size 4 or larger combination motor control units and branch feeder units connects directly to the unit device terminals. Type C User (field) control wiring and load wiring on Size 3 or smaller motor control units connects to master terminal blocks mounted at the top or bottom of those vertical sections containing control units. Unit control wiring and load wiring on Size 3 or smaller units are factory-wired from unit-located terminal blocks to the master terminal blocks. User load (power) wiring for Size 4 or larger units connects directly to the device terminals. As an option, user load (power) wiring for all sizes of motor control units may connect directly to the device terminals within the MCC units. See page 60 for load wiring options. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Product Description Codes and Standards Enclosure Types Product Description NEMA 1 Intended for indoor use only. NEMA 1 enclosures are designed primarily to provide protection against contact with energized equipment inside. They are to be used in locations where normal service conditions exist. NEMA 1 Gasketed (NEMA 1A) Intended to restrict the entrance of dust and falling dirt into NEMA 1 enclosures. NEMA 1 Gasketed enclosures are not dust-tight. Neoprene gasketing is the standard material used. NEMA 3R Intended for outdoor use only. NEMA 3R enclosures are designed primarily to provide protection against falling rain and sleet and remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as dust, internal condensation, internal icing, or extreme heat or cold. The Model 6 NEMA 3R enclosure is built with galvannealed steel, which provides a high level of resistance to corrosion when compared to standard hot or cold rolled steel with the same paint finish. NEMA 12 Intended for indoor use only. NEMA 12 enclosures are designed primarily to protect against dust, falling dirt, light splashing, and dripping of non-corrosive liquid. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation. Shipping Weights One, two, or three vertical sections can be shipped together on a pallet. Larger MCCs are split into shipping blocks of three sections maximum. The following table lists typical approximate shipping weights for a normal mix of MCC equipment. Some sections, based on installed devices and width of the section, may vary from values shown in the table. Approximate MCC Shipping Weights Enclosure Type Depth (inches) 1 Section (lbs) 2 Sections (lbs) 3 Sections (lbs) NEMA 1, 1A, 12 NEMA 3R Non-Walk-In 15 600 1200 1800 15 ➀ (27.2 in. overall) 900 1800 2700 20 750 1500 2250 20 ➀ (32.2 in. overall) 1050 2100 3150 NEMA 1, 1A, 12 NEMA 3R Non-Walk-In ➀ See the NEMA 3R dimensions drawing on page 155. Altitude Ratings The following table lists the MCC derating factors necessary at altitudes of 6,600 ft (2,000 m) and higher. Altitude 6,600 ft (2,000 m) ① Altitude Rating Correction Factors ① Full Load Current System Voltage Ambient Temperature 1.0 1.0 1.0 8,500 ft (2,600 m) 0.99 0.95 1.0 13,000 ft (3,900 m) 0.96 0.80 0.95 14,000 ft (4,300 m) 0.95 0.80 0.90 15,000 ft (4,600 m) 0.93 0.80 0.85 For variable frequency drives or solid state reduced voltage starters, Altitude Rating Correction Factors may differ. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office. 12 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Product Description Motor Control Center Heat Dissipation The following table lists the approximate heat dissipation of various MCC units. This information is often requested by engineers who are sizing HVAC equipment to cool and ventilate equipment rooms. Values include an estimate of heat dissipated by the MCC Power Bus. To use, add the values for each of the units in the MCC. Values are given in BTUs per minute or watts. To provide BTUs per hour, multiply the BTUs per minute by 60. The values given are for “typical” applications, and include an adjustment for power bus contribution. Make the following adjustments for special situations: Add 10–20 percent to the total heat dissipation for MCCs that make extensive use of relays, timers, and other control devices. Add 10 percent to the total heat dissipation for MCCs with 1200–1600 A main bus. Add 20 percent to the total heat dissipation for MCCs with 2000 A main bus. Typical Heat Dissipation Values ➀ Description Size/Rating 1 Combination Starters (Circuit Breaker or Fusible Disconnect) Heat Dissipation BTUs/min Watts 4.5 79 2 6 106 3 12 210 4 24 420 5 40 700 FA (15–100 A) 4.5 79 KA (110–250 A) 12 210 Main and Branch Feeder Breakers LA (300–400 A) 13 230 MA (500–600 A) 22 390 30 A 2.1 37 46 60 A 2.6 100 A 4.7 85 200 A 13 230 400 A 17 300 600 A 22 390 Main and Branch Feeder Switches ➀ For variable frequency drives, solid state reduced voltage starters, and programmable logic control, unit heat dissipation can be significant. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for the heat dissipation of these devices. Structure Steel Gauge Information Model 6 MCCs are totally enclosed, dead front, free standing assemblies. All steel is in compliance with UL 845 / CSA requirements: Part Description 12 Back Plates: 20–30 in. wide 16 35 in. wide End Closing Plates Unit Doors 11/03 Thickness (Gauge) Corner Channels 14 16 (NEMA 3R: 12 gauge) 14 and 16 (NEMA 3R: 12 gauge on outer door) Side Channels 11 Top and Bottom Frame 12 Top and Bottom Plates 14 Base Channels 10 Lifting Angle 7 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 13 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Product Description Product Description 14 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Structures and Bussing Application and General Information SECTION 2—APPLICATION AND GENERAL INFORMATION Structures and Bussing Structure Each section provides 72 in. of vertical mounting space for MCC units. Special sections are required for selected units such as autotransformer starters and some main breakers. Structures include vertical ground bus, with a 42,000 A bus withstand rating. NEMA/EEMAC Enclosure Type Depth General Purpose NEMA 1 General Purpose NEMA 1 Gasketed (often referred to as NEMA 1A) 15 in. - Standard 20 in. - Available Industrial Duty NEMA 12 Outdoor Duty NEMA 3R Non-Walk-In Outdoor Duty NEMA 3R Walk-In (Contact the Project Support and Engineering Center.) Main Bus Amps and Material ➀ Horizontal Bus 600 A tin-plated aluminum 1200 A silver-plated copper 600 A tin-plated copper 1600 A tin-plated copper (20 in. deep only) 600 A silver-plated copper 1600 A silver-plated copper (20 in. deep only) 800 A tin-plated aluminum 2000 A tin-plated copper (20 in. deep only) 800 A tin-plated copper 2000 A silver-plated copper (20 in. deep only) 800 A silver-plated copper 2500 A tin-plated copper (20 in. deep only) ➁ 1200 A tin-plated aluminum 2500 A silver-plated copper (20 in. deep only) ➁ 1200 A tin-plated copper For 3PH4W systems, see page 23. ➀ Ratings shown based on 149° F (65° C) max. temperature rise per UL 845. Consult your local Schneider Electric field sales office for current density ratings. ➁ Not available in NEMA 12 or 3R enclosures. Bussing Options and Modifications Description Bus bar surge protection (Requires main disconnect. Installed in 6 in. unit and will be located as close as possible to the main device.) Not for use on ungrounded systems. Note: Capacitor unit is not needed for surge protection. Steel or copper vertical ground bus (INCLUDED AS STANDARD) 300 A vertical bus – tin-plated copper (INCLUDED AS STANDARD) Substitute 600 A vertical bus – tin-plated copper Substitute 600 A vertical bus – silver-plated copper 4 bolt splice (captive) on main/horizontal bus (INCLUDED AS STANDARD) 42,000 A rms Bus Withstand Rating (Modifications to increase the bus system withstand rating to meet available fault current requirements.) Does not increase individual unit ratings. 65,000 A rms 85,000 A rms 100,000 A rms ➀ Tin-plated copper horizontal ground bus - 1/4 in. x 1 in. (INCLUDED AS STANDARD) Substitute tin-plated copper horizontal ground bus - 1/4 in. x 2 in. Optional 2 in. main/horizontal bus – tin-plated copper Optional 2 in. main/horizontal bus – silver-plated copper ➀ 480 V maximum Required on 2500 A horizontal bus 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 15 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Structures and Bussing Structure Options and Modifications Description 12 in. high pull box 18 in. high pull box Two-piece top plate Bottom plate for NEMA/EEMAC 1 Gasketed Drip hood (Not available with 2500A horizontal bus) Strip heater (200 Watts at 120 V) (Not available in sections with Size 6 RVAT, bottom feed main lugs, bottom feed mains and branches over 600 A, or distribution transformers) Thermostat for control of strip heater (6 heaters maximum) Rear doors (20 in. deep sections only) 9 in. wide vertical wireway (sections 25 in. wide.This option applies only to sections with plug-in units.) Wire tie retainers in vertical wireway Automatic Vertical Bus Shutters White unit interiors (included with Industrial package) NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1 Gasketed, or 12 Non-standard exterior color (includes one coat of Schneider Electric selected paint.) NEMA/EEMAC 3R Fishtape barrier (included with Industrial package) (Prevents rising of bottom-entering fishtapes into wireway.) Rodent barriers (Standard) GFI receptacle (NEMA/EEMAC 3R Non-Walk-In) Fluorescent light (NEMA/EEMAC 3R Non-Walk-In) Reduced height construction: Structure height including base channels (without lifting angles): 79.5 in. 73. 5 in. 67.5 in. Available unit mounting space: 60 in. 54 in. 48 in. Amount section shortened: 12 in. 18 in. 24 in. Application - Not available on back-to-back, corner, NEMA 3R, or sections with neutral bussing. Reduced height construction reduces the section’s unit mounting space and does not reduce either the top or bottom horizontal wireway. Special Structures (Not available in NEMA/EEMAC 3R Construction or Reduced Height Sections) Description Application Back-to-back splice transition section 2500 A Max. Through-the-back splice ➀ 1200 A Max. Corner Sections 2500 A Max. ➀ Tin plated copper splice standard. 20.00 508 or 20.00 12.00 508 305 25.00 635 20.00 508 or 31.00 25.00 787 or 635 41.00 1041 1.00 15.00 1.00 381 or 25 Between Sections Back-To-Back Transition Section Top View ➀ Not available with neutral bus or relay sections. 20.00 508 Through-the-Back Splice Top View ➀ Dual Dimensions = 25 Between Sections INCHES millimeters 15.00 381 or Front 20.00 508 Corner Section Top View 16 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Structures and Bussing Application and General Information Model 5 to Model 6 Transition Section A Model 6 MCC can splice directly to a Model 5 MCC, provided the Model 5 structure was manufactured after May 1992. If the Model 5 MCC was manufactured before May 1992, custom splice plates (NEMA/EEMAC 1 and 1A) or an adapter kit (NEMA/EEMAC 3R) is required and supplied with the appropriate section in the Model 6 lineup. Switchboard to Model 6 Transition Section Square D brand switchboards can be provided with bussed transitions to Model 6 Motor Control Center lineups. The transition section will be supplied as part of the switchboard lineup. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for additional information. Bus Duct Connection I-Line® feeder busway compartments must always be located at the top of the section. A 12 in. high pull box is required. I-Line Busway should be positioned edgewise A, B, C, left-to-right as shown in the figure. To facilitate installation, both front and side accessibility is recommended. NO ADDITIONAL MOUNTING SPACE IS REQUIRED. Must be “I-Line II Feeder End” Style; Qwik Flange™ is not available. NEMA/EEMAC 3R is not available. Bus duct connections are not UL Listed in MCCs. Contact the factory for 2500 A applications. W W/2 A B C D CL Typical MCC Section D/2 CL Front Top View No Main Disconnect ➀ MCC Bus Width Depth Ampacity (In.) (In.) ➀ ➁ ➂ 11/03 C/B Disconnect ➁ Fusible Main Disconnect ➁ Conn MCC Mains Ampacity Width (In.) Depth (In.) Conn MCC Mains Ampacity Width (In.) Depth (In.) Conn 600 A 800 A 1200 A 20 15 or 20 Bus 110A–600 A 20 15 or 20 Cable 200 A–600 A 20 15 or 20 Cable 1600 A 2000 A 25 ➂ 20 Bus 800 A–1200 A 25 20 Bus 800 A–1200 A 25 20 Bus — — — — 1600 A–2000 A 30 20 Bus 1600 A–2000 A 30 20 Bus With no main disconnect, connection from busway to horizontal bus is done with main bus. A main lug compartment is not required. With a main disconnect, connection from busway to disconnect is done with either cable or bus depending on ampacity. A 25 in. wide section is a standard section with a 9 in. wireway and will accept plug-on units. A 72 in. unit mounting space is available. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 17 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Structures and Bussing Model 4 to Model 6 Transition Section (Not Available In NEMA/EEMAC 3R Construction) Provides transition from an existing Model 4 to a new Model 6 MCC. The transition requires a 12 in. extension on the first section of the Model 6 lineup. A transition section does not affect the space calculation when estimating the number of sections during pricing. The transition section must be ordered with at least one Model 6 section and cannot ship separately. The ampacity of the Model 6 horizontal bus must be equal to or exceed the ampacity of the Model 4 horizontal bus. NOTE: Splice bars are included with the transition section. The transition section will match the depth of the Model 6 MCC, and can be used to splice to an existing back-to-back Model 4 MCC (20 in. deep). The transition section will be rear aligned with both the Model 4 and the Model 6 sections. On 3-phase 4-wire systems, the 3-phase bus bars will splice together, but the Model 4 neutral bus bar will not be carried through in the Model 6. NOTE: When ordering a Model 4 to Model 6 transition section, you must provide the original Model 4 factory order number. Basic Transition ➀ Model 4 on left and Model 6 on right Model 6 on left and Model 4 on right ➀ Includes 12 in. wide structure with 800 A bus as standard. Transition Bussing Modifications Model 4 Bus 600 A Aluminum or Copper Model 6 Bus 600 A Copper 800 A Aluminum 800 A Copper 1000 A Aluminum (2) 2 in. 1200 A Copper 1200 A Aluminum (2) 3 in. 1200 A Copper 1000 A Aluminum (1) 4 in. 1200 A Copper 1200 A Copper (2) 2 in. 1200 A Copper 1000 A Copper (1) 3 in. 1200 A Copper 1200 A Copper (1) 4 in. 1200 A Copper 1400 A Aluminum (2) 4 in. 1600 A Copper 1600 A Copper (2) 3 in. 1600 A Copper 1800 A Copper (2) 4 in. 2000 A Copper 2000 A Copper (2) 4 in. 2000 A Copper 18 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Incoming Devices Incoming or main devices are used to connect power to the motor control center. In the majority of MCC applications, the system is rated as 480 V, 3PH3W. If a neutral wire connection is required, a neutral kit can be supplied (see “Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral” on page 23). Typically, one of three devices is used to connect power to the MCC: main lugs, main circuit breaker, or main fusible switch. One of these devices is connected to the horizontal or main bus with cable or hard bus. Cabled or bussed branch devices or cabled starter units (those with an L, M, or P frame circuit breaker disconnect, or 600 A or larger fusible switch disconnect) cannot be installed in the same section as a main device. As with all electrical equipment rated 600 V or less, incoming cables must be rated using the 75° C (167° F) chart in the National Electrical Code (NEC). The incoming lugs are 90° C (194° F) lugs and 90° C (194° F) cable can be used, however the cable must be applied to the 75° C (167° F) ratings. All main devices must be top or bottom located. Main Lug Compartments • Main lug compartments must be specified in the absence of other incoming line provisions. • 3PH4W main lugs include neutral assembly for cable connection to other units with solid neutrals. • Main lug units short circuit current ratings to 100,000 A are available. Top Located Main Lug Compartments System Main Lugs 3-Phase 3-Wire Amps Space (Inches) 600 800 6 1200 12 1600 ➁ 2000 ➁ Horizontal Bus Connection Bussed 72 2500 ➁ 3-Phase 4-Wire 600 800 9 1200 ➀ 12 1600 ➁ 2000 ➁ Bussed 72 2500 ➁ ➀ ➁ 25 in. wide section with 9 in. wireway 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Bottom Located Main Lug Compartments System Amps Space (Inches) 600 18 1200 ➀ 3-Phase 3-Wire 1600 ➁ 2000 ➁ Horizontal Bus Connection 36 Bussed 72 2500 ➁ 600 1200 ➀ 3-Phase 4-Wire 1600 ➁ 2000 ➁ 18 36 Bussed 72 2500 ➁ ➀ ➁ 11/03 25 in. wide section with 9 in. wireway 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 19 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices Main Circuit Breakers • Main circuit breaker units are located in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Mains must be top or bottom located. • All main breakers include a high-interrupting thermal magnetic circuit breaker. • All units are for 3PH3W systems. 3PH4W applications may require additional space (“Three Phase/ Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral” on page 23). Top Located Main Circuit Breakers Frame Type Maximum Amperes AIC 240 V 480 V 600 V Space (inches) Connection Molded Case Breakers KH 250 65,000 35,000 25,000 15 KI 250 100,000 100,000 65,000 21 Plug-on LH 400 65,000 35,000 25,000 21 LI 600 100,000 100,000 65,000 27 MH 600 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 800 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 800 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀ Cabled Main Circuit Breaker MH MH 1000 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀➂ 1200 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ 2000 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ PH Bussed Electronic Breakers LX 400 100,000 65,000 50,000 27 MX 800 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 Cabled ➀ ➁ ➂ MX 800 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀ PX 2000 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Bottom Located Main Circuit Breakers Frame Type Maximum Amperes AIC 240 V 480 V 600 V Space (inches) Connection Molded Case Breakers KH 250 65,000 35,000 25,000 15 KI 250 100,000 100,000 65,000 21 LH 400 65,000 35,000 25,000 27 LI 400 100,000 100,000 100,000 27 LI 450–600 100,000 100,000 65,000 36 MH 600 65,000 50,000 25,000 36 800 65,000 50,000 25,000 36 800 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀ Plug-on MH MH 1000 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀➂ 1200 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ 2000 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ PH ➀ ➁ ➂ Cabled Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section 20 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Bottom Located Main Circuit Breakers (continued) Frame Type Maximum Amperes AIC 240 V 480 V 600 V Space (inches) Connection Electronic Breakers LX 400 100,000 65,000 50,000 30 MX 800 65,000 50,000 25,000 36 Cabled ➀ ➁ ➂ MX 800 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀ PX 2000 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Main Fusible Switches • Main fusible switch units are located in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Mains must be top or bottom located. • All main switches use automatic molded case switches in series with Class R or L fuse clips as standard. Unit short circuit current ratings to 100,000 A are available. • All main switches listed are for 3PH3W systems. 3PH4W applications may require additional space (“Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral” on page 23). Top Located Main Fusible Switches Unit Type And Amps ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ Space (Inches) 250 V Max. 600 V Max. 200 200 400 400 45 600 600 54 ➄ Connection to Bus 24 800 ➀ 800 ➀ 72 ➁ 1000 ➀➃ 1000 ➀➃ 72 ➁ 1200 ➂ 1200 ➂ 72 ➁ 1600 ➂ 1600 ➂ 72 ➁ 2000 ➂ 2000 ➂ 72 ➁ Cabled Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Requires single shipping split. 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section. 3PH4W applications require 60 in. of mounting space. Bottom Located Main Fusible Switches Unit Type And Amps ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ 11/03 Space (Inches) 250 V Max. 600 V Max. 200 200 400 400 54 600 600 66 ➃ Connection to Bus 24 Cabled 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Requires single shipping split. 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section 3PH4W applications require 72 in. of mounting space. Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section. 3PH4W applications require 60 in. of mounting space. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 21 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices Bottom Located Main Fusible Switches Unit Type And Amps 250 V Max. 800 ➀ 1000 ➀➄ ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ 600 V Max. Space (Inches) 800 ➀➄ 72 ➁ ➀➄ 1000 Connection to Bus 72 ➁ 1200 ➂ 1200 ➂ 72 ➁ 1600 ➂ 1600 ➂ 72 ➁ 2000 ➂ 2000 ➂ 72 ➁ Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Requires single shipping split. 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section 3PH4W applications require 72 in. of mounting space. Ground fault option requires 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section. 3PH4W applications require 60 in. of mounting space. Standard Wire Lug Ranges (Mechanical) Mechanical set-screw type lugs are supplied as standard for Model 6 MCC main, branch, and neutral line and/or load connection. Compression crimp type lugs are available (see “Wiring Options” on page 60). Main Lugs ➀ Main Lug Amps Lug Wire Range Lugs Per Phase/Neutral 600 3/0–500 2 800 3/0–500 3 1200 3/0–750 ➀ 4 1600 3/0–750 6 2000, 2500 3/0–750 6 750 MCM requires addition of pullbox for proper wire bending space. Main and Branch Circuit Breaker Lug Ranges Circuit Breaker Frame Amps Lug Wire Range Lugs Per Phase FA/FH ➀ 15–100 #12–#1/0 1 KA/KH/KI 70–250 #4–350 1 #1–250 2 LA/LH 125–400 LI/LX #1–600 1 300–600 #4/0–500 2 450–800 3/0–500 2 (top) 3 (bottom) MA/MH/MX PA/PH/PX ➀ 800 3/0–500 3 1000 3/0–750 3 1200–2000 3/0–750 6 Dual branch breaker units 35–100A have (1) #12-#3 per phase. Main and Branch Fusible Switch Lug Ranges Main Switch Amps Lug Wire Range Lugs Per Phase 30 #12–4 1 60 #8–1 1 22 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Main and Branch Fusible Switch Lug Ranges Main Switch Amps Lug Wire Range Lugs Per Phase 100 #14–2 1 200 #6–350 (mains) #1–300 (branches) 1 #1–250 2 400 #1–600 1 600 3/0–500 2 800 3/0–500 3 1000 3/0–750 3 1200 3/0–750 6 1600 3/0–750 6 2000 3/0–750 6 Neutral Lug Ranges Application 100 A main or branch Lug Wire Range (2) #10–1/0 200/250 A main or branch (2) #4–300 400–800 A main or branch ➀ (2) 3/0–500 800 A main or branch 1000 A main or branch 1200 A main or branch 1600–2000 A main or branch 600–2500 A main lugs Neutral rating 1200 A max. (3) 3/0–500 (4) 3/0–750 See the “Main Lugs” table on page 22. (4) 3/0–750 (14) #6–300 600–800 A bus (1) 1.5 in. x 1/4 in. CU 1200–2500 A bus (2) 1.5 in. x 1/4 in. CU 100% rating is 1250 A max. ➀ Holes provided for customer variations 800 A is a cabled unit with maximum short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 50 kAIC at 480 V. For applications above 50 k, refer to full-section bussed device. Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral If the motor control center contains only motor or three phase loads, and no future four-wire loads are anticipated, it is not necessary to bring the neutral conductor into the MCC. As an option, a neutral lug termination (see Figure 1 on page 24) can be provided in the incoming main section to terminate a neutral conductor. Additional lugs can be added for connections to the neutral. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for sizes and quantities available. When four-wire loads are present in the MCC, solid neutral bussing (see Figure 2 on page 24) can be provided in individual sections and connected to provide a continuous neutral bar. Incoming and outgoing neutral conductors can be terminated at the neutral lug assembly located in each vertical wireway (neutral drop) for easy access. Neutral drops can be supplied in one of three methods: • only mains and units including neutral lug terminations (minimum), • one drop per shipping split (optimum), or • in each section (maximum). Lugs are not provided when selecting solid neutral bussing, but holes are pre-drilled to accommodate user-mounted lugs. A neutral lug assembly will be furnished automatically on all 3PH4W systems for the incoming main section when selecting solid neutral bus. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 23 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices A special 12 in. neutral distribution unit (see Figure 3 below) can be provided to terminate branch device neutral connections. Such branches should be located close to the main for easier interconnections. Neutral lug must also be selected with the neutral distribution assembly. Description Application Space (Inches) 100 A main or branch (not including Compac™ 6) 200/250 A main or branch 0 400 A main or branch ➃ Neutral lug termination ➀ ➁ (Provides termination for fourth wire on 3PH4W systems) 600 A top located main 18 600 A bottom main or branch 6 800 A main or branch 1000 A main or branch 0 1200 A main or branch 1600–2000 A main or branch See 3PH4W System in “Main Lug Compartments” on page 19. 600–2500 A main lugs Neutral distribution unit ➀ Neutral rating 1250 A max. 12 Solid neutral bus ➀ (Price per section–20 in. 600–800 A (1)1.5 in. x 0.25 in. cu deep sections required) Neutral bus drop ➂ 1200–2500 A (2) 1.5 in. x 0.25 in. cu (Provides vertical extension of solid neutral bus into vertical wireway to facilitate neutral Max. 100% rating is 1200 A connections from units) ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ 0 Neutrals in units are factory-connected with solid neutral bussing or neutral distribution unit when units are selected with neutral lug termination assembly. Neutral distribution units must go in next adjacent section on bottom feed full section mains. 12 in. additional space not required on top feed full section (72 in.) mains. 25 in. wide section required when used with a cabled main or branch device (L-Frame or larger circuit breaker and 400 A or larger fusible switch). When >35kA SCCR or electronic trip, additional 6 in. space required on top located mains and 3 in. space for bottom located mains and branches. Four-Wire Examples Solid Neutral Bus A B C A N B C Neutral Lug Termination Assembly A B C Neutral Drops Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect Cable Neutral Lug Termination Assembly Neutral Lug Termination Assembly Neutral Distribution Unit Cable Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 24 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Service Entrance Label (Not Available on Main Lug Systems) Description 3PH3W system with a main breaker/switch Application Space (Inches) 110 A–2000 A ➀ 0 110–400 A without GFI ➁ 3PH4W system with a main breaker/switch (Solid neutral bussing and/or neutral lug termination required on 4-wire systems) 300–400 A with GFI ➂ 15 450–600 A without GFI ➁ 6 450–600 A with GFI ➁ 12 ➄ 800–2000 A ➁ ➃ 0 Any main with ground fault (except 450–600 A as noted) ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ Ground fault protection is standard for all 1000 A and larger mains when service entrance is specified and system voltage is 480 V Requires neutral lug termination assembly 21 in. for top feed applications Ground fault (GFI) required on solidly grounded electrical services of more than 150 V to ground for any service disconnect rated 1000 A or more 18 in. when a metering option is selected PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor CM3000 and CM4000 PowerLogic circuit monitors are multifunction, digital metering and monitoring devices capable of replacing a variety of meters, relays, transducers, and other components. Data available for local viewing includes metered values plus extensive min/max, alarm, and analog/digital input data. Circuit monitor data is available for viewing and recording via standard RS-485, RS-232 (CM4000 only), or optional Ethernet communications. A 4-line x 20-character LCD type display with customizable displays is standard. An optional Vacuum Fluorescent Display with backlighting is also available. The circuit monitors offer waveform capture, event/alarm logging, and custom alarms. Description Application Monitors CM3250 with LCD Display Circuit Monitor, data logging, waveform capture, 8MB memory, LCD Display CM3350 with LCD Display Circuit Monitor, same features as CM3250 with Disturbance Monitoring CM4000 with LCD Display Instrumentation, data logging, waveform and disturbance capture, programmable logic, 2 option card slots CM4000T with LCD Display CM4000 features plus high-speed voltage transient detection and capture. CMDLC 4-line x 20 character Liquid Crystal Display with backlighting CMDVF 4-line x 20 character Vacuum Fluorescent Display with I/R port and proximity sensor substituted for standard LCD display I/O Modules IOC 44 ➀➁ Field Installable I/O card with 4 status inputs, 3 relay (10A) outputs, and 1 pulse output (KYZ) IOX0404 ➂ I/O Extender module with 4 status inputs and 4 analog inputs (4 to 20 mA) IOX2411 ➂ I/O Extender module with 4 inputs (32Vdc), 2 outputs (60Vdc), 1 analog input (0-5Vdc), 1 analog output (4-20mA) IOXO8 ➂ I/O Extender module with 8 status inputs (120Vac) IOX ➂ I/O Extender module only, no installed I/O, accepts up to 8 I/O modules with maximum of 4 analog I/O Accessories ECC21 ➀➁ ➀ ➁ ➂ 11/03 Ethernet communications card, 100Mbps fiber and 10/100 Mbps UTP Ethernet port and 1 RS-485 master port Only one slot is available for I/O Modules or the Ethernet ECC21 card on CM3000. Two slots are available for two IOC44 I/O Modules or one IOC44 I/O Module and one Ethernet ECC21 card on CM4000/4000T. Available on CM4000/4000T only. Choose only one module per circuit monitor. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 25 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices Circuit Monitor Space Requirements Device Type Additional Space Rqmts (Inches) Main Lugs 600 – 1200 A 12 1600 – 2000 A 12➀ Main Breaker 110 – 250 A 21 300 - 400 A without Form U341 (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) 21 Top or Bottom Located, 300 – 400 A with Form U341 (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) and without Form U231 (neutral Lug termination) 21 Top Located, 300 – 400 A with Form U341 (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) and with Form U231 (neutral Lug termination) 15 Bottom Located, 300 – 400 A with Form U341 (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) and with Form U231 (neutral Lug termination) 21 Top Located, 450 – 600 A, without Form U231(neutral lug termination) 18 Bottom Located, 450 - 600 A, without Form U231(neutral lug termination) 21 Bottom Located, 450 - 600 A, with Form U231(neutral lug termination) 18 Top or Bottom Located, 800 - 2000 A 12➀ Main Fusible Switches 200 A 18 Top Located, 400 A 15 Bottom Located, 400 A 18 Top Located, 600 A 15 Bottom Located, 600 A 12 Top or Bottom Located, 800 – 2000 A 12➀ ➀ If no space is available for the circuit monitor, an option requiring no additional space for the circuit monitor module is available by integrating the metering equipment onto the door of the main. On bottom-located mains, this option protrudes 6.2 inches out from the door and reduces the customer aisleway by the same dimension. PowerLogic® Power Meter The PowerLogic power meter is capable of replacing a full complement of basic analog meters. This cost-effective, true RMS meter can be operated as a stand-alone device or as part of a PowerLogic Power Monitoring and Control System to help reduce energy and maintenance costs by providing valuable information. • PowerLogic and Modbus® RS-485 Communications • 0.25% accuracy on current and voltage • UL Listed and CSA approved. 26 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Power Meter Space Requirements Device Type Space Added to Device Type (Inches) Main Lugs Top or bottom located, 600–1200 A 9 Top or bottom located, 1600–2500 A 0 Main Breaker Top or bottom located, 110–400 A 9 Top or bottom located, 450–600 A, without neutral lug termination 9 Top located, 450–600 A, with neutral lug termination 6 Bottom located, 450–600 A, with neutral lug termination 6 Top or bottom located, 800 A (up to 50 kA fault currents @ 480 V) 9 Top or bottom located, 800 A (full section) 0 Top or bottom located, 1000–2000 A (full section) 0 Main Fusible Switch Top or bottom located, 200–400 A 9 Top or bottom located, 600 A, without neutral lug termination 9 Top located, 600 A, with neutral lug termination 9 Bottom located, 600 A, with neutral lug termination 0 Top or bottom located, > 600 A 0 Branch Circuit Breaker ➀ 15–100 A 9 110–250 A, KA and KH breaker frame (standard and high interrupting circuit breaker) 9 110–250 A, KI breaker frame (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) 9 300–600 A 9 Top or bottom located, 800 A (up to 50 kA fault currents at 480 V) 9 800–1200 A 0 Branch Fusible Switch ➀ 30–400 A 9 600 A, without neutral lug termination 12 600 A, with neutral lug termination 0 800–1200 A 0 ➀ Not available on Compac 6 (six inch units) PowerLogic® Power Meter and Circuit Monitor Comparison Model PM-620 Model PM-650 Amps, Volts, Power, Energy, PF X X X X X X Communications: RS 485 Modbus® X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Optional Optional Optional Optional X X X X Feature Communications: Optional Ethernet Demand Readings, THD Min/Max, I/O X Front Optical Comms Downloadable Firmware 11/03 Model Model Model Model CM-3250 CM-3350 CM-4000 CM-4000T Alarm/Relay Functions X X X X X On-board Data/Event Logging X X X X X © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 27 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices PowerLogic® Power Meter and Circuit Monitor Comparison Feature Model PM-620 Model PM-650 Model Model Model Model CM-3250 CM-3350 CM-4000 CM-4000T Waveform Capture X Disturbance Monitoring X X X X X X Extended Memory X X Programmable Logic X X Transient Detection X PowerLogic® Ethernet Gateways The PowerLogic devices listed below provide an interface between Ethernet and Modbus® devices. In addition to the high-speed communications, the Ethernet connectivity opens up information access via standard web browsers. The gateways can connect with up to 64 Modbus or PowerLogic devices. Each unit includes the gateway, control power disconnect, fused control power transformer, and DC power supply. Connection cables to the Ethernet network are not included. Description Application Max. Space (Inches) EGX-200 PowerLogic Ethernet Gateway with one UTP Ethernet Port (10/100 Mbit), one RS-485 serial port, and a second serial port configurable for RS-485 or RS-232 9 EGX-400 PowerLogic Ethernet Gateway with one UTP Ethernet Port (10/100Mbit), one Fiber optic port (100 Mbit), one RS-485 serial port and a second serial port configurable for RS-485 or RS-232, and 8 MB of memory for storing web pages, instruction bulletins, equipment drawings, etc. 9 Ethernet Hubs An Ethernet hub➀ serves as a hardware interface between the EGX Ethernet gateway and two Ethernet connections: the customer's Ethernet network outside the MCC and the programming port on the outside of the MCC door. A choice of hub types is available, depending on the transmission speed (10 million bits per second or 100 million bits per second) and hardware (copper wire or fiber optic) the customer would prefer. For Transparent Ready™ MCCs, a 100Mb hub for copper wire will be factory installed if no other choice is made. NOTE: The Ethernet hub and bulkhead port connector are not provided unless a Transparent Ready level is requested. For customers requesting network provisions only, the gateway is provided with no hub included. Hub Description Space Adder Shipping Code 100Mb Ethernet RS485 (Available with EGX Gateways only) Provides two (2) 100Mbps Ethernet connections for the customer to connect both the Ethernet factory network and programming port to the EGX gateway. A bulkhead connector is provided on the outside of the MCC for programming the gateway during commissioning. 0 C 10Mb Ethernet RS485 (Available with EGX Gateways only) Provides two 10Mbps Ethernet connections for the customer to connect both the Ethernet factory network and programming port to EGX or PowerServer applications. A bulkhead connector is provided on the outside of the MCC for programming the gateway during commissioning. 0 C Fiber Optic Interface (Available with EGX Gateways only) Provides two 100Mbps Fiber Optic Ethernet connections for the customer to connect both the Ethernet factory network and programming port to EGX or PowerServer applications. A bulkhead connector is provided on the outside of the MCC for programming the gateway during commissioning. 0 C ➀ An Ethernet hub is required on TR1 or TR2. If no other hub is chosen by the customer, a 100Mb Ethernet RS485 hub for copper wire will be provided with an EGX Ethenet gateway on TR1 or TR2. 28 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Transparent Ready™ Factory Configurations Motor Control Center Transparent Ready options provide the ability to access pre-programmed/ pre-linked web pages in the MCC equipment. This feature allows the customer to quickly commission and view a wide range of process data using web browser software. The MCC will be pre-tested and pre-wired at the factory with the Ethernet connection ready for the customer's network. The Transparent Ready levels in the table below offer web page choices for real-time data, enhanced graphics, and reporting capability. Pre-Configured Factory Software Software Description TR1–Essential Web enabled and factory configured for Ethernet; 5 Web pages of real-time data using Web-Generator 1 (WG-1) ➀ TR2–Deluxe ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ All features of TR1 plus graphical pages for use on EGX system-supported software: Web-Generator 2 (WG-2) ➃ Application Mains monitoring only ➁ Main + downstream devices monitoring ➂ Main + downstream devices monitoring ➄ Web Generator (WG-1) software provides basic informational pages for use with the PowerLogic® ECC or EGX Ethernet gateways. Requires PowerLogic meter selected on the MCC main. Requires an ECC21 card on the circuit monitor (if selected) or an EGX400 Ethernet gateway. Requires at least one Modbus® compatible device (Motor Logic® Plus overload relay, drive, PowerLogic meter, or soft start). Requires an ECC21 card on the circuit monitor (if selected) or an EGX400 Ethernet Gateway. Web Generator (WG-2) software provides advanced informational pages for use with the PowerLogic EGX Gateway. Requires at least one Modbus compatible device (Motor Logic Plus overload relay, drive, PowerLogic meter, or soft start). Requires an EGX400 Ethernet gateway. Analog Metering Options On Mains Main Device Type Meter Sequence Ammeter Voltmeter Space (Inches) Main Lugs Top located, 600–1200 A Top located, 1600–2500 A Bottom located, 600–1200 A 15 HOT HOT Bottom located, 1600–2500 A Analog Meter 0 12 0 Main Circuit Breakers Top or bottom located, 225 A Top or bottom located, 225 A (extra-high interrupting circuit breaker) 24 HOT 18 15 ➀ Top or bottom located, 400 A HOT Top or bottom located, 600 A Top located, 600 A (neutral lug termination) 15 ➀ 12 ➀ COLD 15 ➀ Bottom located, 600 A (neutral lug termination) Top or bottom located, 800–2000 A 0 Main Fusible Switches Top or bottom located, 200–400 A 15 Top located, 600 A Bottom located, 600 A HOT 6 Bottom located, 600 A (neutral lug termination) 0 Top or bottom located, 800–2000 A 0 ➀ 11/03 12 HOT No additional space required if system requires the Main to be installed in a bussed 25 in. wide section © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 29 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices Metering Options – Total space of unit and meter options shall not exceed 72 in. Description Application Space (Inches) Shorting terminal blocks for metering current transformers (CTs) Any meter with CTs Elapsed time meter Starter unit 0 AC ammeter with CT Starter unit 3 Main and branch feeders AC ammeter with transfer switch and two CTs (three CTs provided on 4-wire systems) Ground detection lights 9➀ When used with voltmeter 0 600–1200 A top located main lugs 9 When used with voltmeter 0 600–1200 A bottom main lugs 0 1600–2000 A main lugs 0 AC voltmeter with VM transfer switch and two potential transformers (PTs) Main and branch feeders (three PTs provided on 4-wire systems) Main lugs 1% meters (Switchboard type) 0 9➀ 9 Price as standard meters and add per meter. 6➀ Main feeders 12 ➀ Main lugs 12 Fuse for metering circuit For special applications only 0 Current transformer (CT) For special applications only 3➀ Potential transformer (PT) For special applications only 6➀ ➀ No additional space required if system requires the main to be installed in a bussed 25 in. wide section. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) Units for MCC Incoming Mains General Information • Important Application Note: TVSS units must be installed on grounded power systems. Do not recommend or specify installation on an ungrounded power system. Select a unit based on the system wiring and transformer secondary feeding the MCC as shown below: • Must be located as close as possible to the incoming main provision. • TVSS units for 4 Wire systems must include a solid neutral bus and/or neutral lug termination assembly in the MCC. All motor control center TVSS Units include as standard: • • • • • • • • • • • Flange mounted disconnect Door mounted diagnostic lights for each phase Audible alarm with Test/Disable/Enable switch Direct copper bus bar connection TVSS with EMI/RFI Filter UL 1449 & 1283 Second Edition Recognized & CSA certified component Individually fused suppression modules High energy parallel MOV design for Categories A, B and C3 applications per IEEE C62.41 criteria. Can be applied to MCCs with 100 kAIC short circuit withstand rating Designed as standard MCC unit construction to enable new or retrofit applications One form C alarm contact 30 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Selection Select the TVSS Model based on: 1. System voltage, i.e., 480Vac, 240Vac, 208Vac, or 600Vac. 2. Desired surge current capacity, i.e., 120kA, 160kA, or 240kA. If a surge current capacity higher than 240kA is required, more than one TVSS unit can be priced and added to the MCC to bring it to the desired surge current capacity. When adding more than one TVSS unit to an MCC, all units should be mounted in the same section and in adjacent mounting spaces. 3. Type of loads to be protected, i.e., branch loads, service entrance applications, or large individual loads. 4. If backup redundancy is a requirement, two TVSS units should be priced and added in the same MCC section and in adjacent mounting spaces. 5. TVSS units will eventually reach an end-of-life condition and must be repaired or replaced. To assure continuous protection, a spare TVSS unit should be purchased and put into service when the original TVSS unit reaches its end-of-life condition. Connection Diagrams Diagram A Source Secondary: Three Phase, Four Wire, Wye Power System with Neutral Bonded to Ground Neutral Not Brought to MCC Three Phase, Three Wire Motor Control Center MOV A MOV B MOV C MOV G Diagram B Source Secondary: Three Phase, Four Wire, Wye Power System with Neutral Bonded to Ground Neutral Brought to MCC Three Phase, Four Wire Motor Control Center MOV A MOV B MOV C MOV G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 31 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Incoming Devices Diagram C Source Secondary: Three Phase, Four Wire, B-Phase High Leg Delta Power System with Neutral Bonded to Ground Three Phase, Three Wire Motor Control Center High Leg B 240 V 240 V 208 V A N 120 V 120 V Neutral Not Brought to MCC MOV A C MOV B MOV C MOV G Diagram D Source Secondary: Three Phase, Four Wire, B-Phase High Leg Delta Power System with Neutral Bonded to Ground Three Phase, Four Wire Motor Control Center High Leg B 240 V 240 V 208 V A 120 V N 120 V Neutral Brought to MCC MOV A MOV B MOV C C MOV G 32 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Incoming Devices Application and General Information Model IMA TVSS (120kA Surge Rating) • For protection of small MCC lineups and non-critical loads • 120,000 amperes per phase surge current capacity Customer Incoming Power Connection to MCC Space (Inches) System Voltage 208 Vac 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Wye secondary transformer with grounded neutral. 480 Vac 600 Vac Transformer with high-leg delta secondary. 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Note: B-phase is configured as the high leg. 6 240 Vac Model IMA TVSS (160kA Surge Rating) • For protection of branch loads/electronics, large individual loads and drives/soft starts • 160,000 amperes per phase surge current capacity Customer Incoming Power Connection to MCC Space (Inches) System Voltage 208 Vac 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Wye secondary transformer with grounded neutral. 480 Vac 600 Vac Transformer with high-leg delta secondary. 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Note: B-phase is configured as the high leg. 6 240 Vac Model IMA TVSS (240kA Surge Rating) • For application on high exposure systems for service entrance protection with large power electronic loads (drives/soft starts) • 240,000 amperes per phase surge current capacity Customer Incoming Power Connection to MCC Space (Inches) System Voltage 208 Vac 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Wye secondary transformer with grounded neutral. 480 Vac 600 Vac Transformer with high-leg delta secondary. 3 phases with or without neutral connected to MCC (3 or 4 wire MCC). Note: B-phase is configured as the high leg. 6 240 Vac Additional Options Space (Inches) Description Surge Counter – Door mounted display which counts the number of transients entering the facility through the suppressor. 11/03 0 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 33 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Branch Feeder Units Branch Feeder Units Circuit Breaker Branch Feeder Units • Branch feeder units may be located in standard 20 in. or 25 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. • The unit interrupting rating is equal to the breaker rating, except as noted. • Units listed are for 3PH3W systems. 3PH4W applications may require additional space (see “Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral” on page 23). Four-wire applications are not available on Compac 6 units. Branch Circuit Breakers Frame Size Frame Type Trip Range AIC 600 V Space Connection (inches) 240 V 480 V GJ 65,000 65,000 — 6 FA 25,000 18,000 14,000 12 FH 65,000 25,000 22,000 12 FH/CL 100,000 100,000 100,000 12 Molded Case Breakers 100 15–100 250 KA 110–250 42,000 25,000 22,000 15 KH 110–250 65,000 35,000 25,000 15 KI 125–250 100,000 100,000 65,000 15 42,000 30,000 22,000 27 65,000 35,000 25,000 27 LA 400 600 Plug-on LI 300–600 100,000 100,000 65,000 27 MA 300–600 42,000 30,000 22,000 24 MH 450–600 MA 800 ➂ Plug-on 300–400 LH Circuit Breaker Branch Feeder Unit Plug-on 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 42,000 30,000 22,000 24 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 65,000 65,000 25,000 Cabled Cabled MH 800 MH ➀ Bussed ➀➂ Bussed 72 1000 ➂ MH 1000 65,000 65,000 25,000 1200 ➂ PH 600–1200 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ Bussed 400 LX 300–400 100,000 65,000 50,000 24 Plug-on 800 ➂ MX 450–800 72 Electronic Breakers 1200 ➂ ➀ ➁ ➂ PX 600–1200 65,000 50,000 25,000 24 Cabled 65,000 65,000 25,000 72 ➀ Bussed 100,000 100,000 65,000 72 ➁ Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep Specify top or bottom load connection 34 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Branch Feeder Units Application and General Information Fusible Switch Branch Feeder Units Fusible Switch Branch Feeder Unit • Branch feeder units may be located in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. • Class H (30–600 A) and Class L (800–1200 A) fuse clips are provided as standard, except Compac 6, six inch units, which use Class J fuse clips. Class R fuse clips can be provided for 30–600 A switches. Class R fuse clips are not available on Compac 6 units. • Fuses are not included as standard. • Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. • Units listed are for 3PH3W systems. Three-phase, four-wire applications may require additional space (see “Three Phase/Four-Wire Wye Systems with Grounded Neutral” on page 23). Four-wire applications are not available on Compac 6 units. Unit Type And Amps 250 V Max. 600 V Max. — 30 A — 60 A Space (Inches) Bus Connection 6 (Compac 6) — 100 A 30 30 60 60 100 100 12 200 200 24 400 400 51 600 600 60 ➄ Plug-on 12 800 ➀ ➂ 1000 ➂ 800 ➀ Cabled ➂ ➃ 1000 ➀ ➂ ➃ 1200 ➁ ➂ 1200 ➁ ➂ ➃ ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ 11/03 ➃ ➅ 72 Bussed 25 in. wide by 20 in. deep section 30 in. wide by 20 in. deep section Specify top or bottom load connection 30 in. wide section when ground fault protection option is selected When using a 4-wire system, 72 in. is required Bottom located only © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 35 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Combination Starter Units Combination starter units combine the requirements of motor overload and short circuit protection into one convenient package. Starter units are provided with Type S or D-Line contactors, thermal or solidstate overloads, and fusible switch or circuit breaker disconnects. Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers FVNR combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVNR starter units with circuit breaker disconnects use Mag-Gard adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breakers and are UL Listed. All Compac 6 NEMA/EEMAC rated six inch units with circuit breaker disconnects use GJ frame Mag-Gard adjustable instantaneous trip breakers. Compac 6 units will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep Model 6 sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a Model 6 vertical section. Motor Control Center unit short circuit ratings to 100 kA are available. See the short circuit rating section for details. NEMA/EEMAC Class I, Type A and Type B-D wiring is offered as standard on Model 6 starter units. Class II and Types B-T and C are available. Starter Type and Horsepower Combination Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker Disconnect 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps Space (Inches) .33 1 3 5 .5 1 3 7.5 1 3 7.5 10 — 1 3 7 15 30 6 (Compac 6) .33 1 3 5 .33 1 3 7.5 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 10 — 1 3 7 15 30 12 — 10 — — 10 15 15 25 — 20 25 — 2 30 50 100 12 — 25 — 30 — 50 30 50 3 50 100 18 30 40 40 50 75 100 100 — 4 250 250 21 — 50 60 75 — 60 75 100 — 125 150 200 125 150 200 — 5 250 250 42 42 400 400 48 48 — 100 125 150 — — — 125 150 200 — 250 300 350 400 250 300 400 — — 400 400 600 600 600 72 (20 in. W X 20 in. D) 6 Power Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled 36 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers FVNR vacuum contactor combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVNR vacuum starters with circuit breaker disconnects use thermal magnetic circuit breakers and melting alloy overloads. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V NEMA Size 600 V Standard C/B Amps 240 V 480 V 30 – 75 – 125 – 40 – 100 150 40 – – – – 50 100 – 200 – – – 125 200 50 – – 150 200 – 60 125 – 60 75 150 200 4 5 175 225 250 75 – – – – 100 200 – 350 – – – 250 350 100 125 250 300 125 150 300 400 150 – 350 – 700 – 200 400 – 800 Space (Inches) Power Bus Connection 21 Plug-on 48 Plug-on 72 (20 in. W X 20 in. D) Cabled 300 450 6 600 Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers All Compac 6 application-rated six inch units with circuit breaker disconnects include TeSys™ D-Line contactors (IEC rated), G frame magnetic only adjustable instantaneous trip breakers, and Class 10 ambient compensated bimetallic overload relays. Compac 6 application-rated six inch units will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a vertical section. Select application rated units based on system voltage and motor full load amps. Application-Rated FVNR Combination Starters with Magnetic Only Circuit Breaker (480 V Max.) Starter Ampacity Range Compac 6 Units 11/03 AC-3 Duty IEC Contactor Overload Relay 208 V 240 V 480 V 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 LRD05 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 LRD06 1.6 to 2.1 1.6 to 2.1 1.6 to 2.1 LRD07 2.1 to 2.5 2.1 to 2.5 2.1 to 2.5 LRD07 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 4.8 4.0 to 4.8 4.0 to 4.8 4.8 to 5.5 4.8 to 5.5 4.8 to 5.5 LRD10 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 LRD12 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 7.6 LRD14 9.0 to 11 9.0 to 9.6 — LRD16 — — 7.6 to 9.0 LRD14 — — 9.0 to 11.0 LRD16 — 9.6 to 11.0 — LRD16 11 to 12.0 11 to 12.0 11 to 12.0 12.0 to 17.5 12.0 to 17.5 12.0 to 14.0 LRD21 17.5 to 22.0 17.5 to 22.0 — LRD22 — — 14 to 17 LRD21 LRD22 LC1D18 LC1D32 LRD08 C/B Amps Space Bus (Inches) Connection 3 7 LRD10 15 6 Plug-on LRD16 — — 17 to 21 22 to 23 22 to 23 21 to 23 23 to 30 23 to 30 23 to 30 30 to 34 30 to 34 30 to 34 LRD3355 34 to 37 34 to 37 — LRD3355 37 to 42 37 to 42 — LRD3357 30 LRD22 LC1D50 LRD2353 50 75 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 37 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Full Voltage Reversing (FVR) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers FVR combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVR starters with circuit breaker disconnects use Mag-Gard adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breakers and are UL Listed. Motor Control Center unit short circuit ratings to 100 kA are available. See short circuit current rating section for details. Starter Type and Horsepower NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps Space (Inches) 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 7 15 30 18 15 25 — 20 25 — 2 30 50 100 18 — 30 — 50 30 50 3 50 100 27 30 40 40 50 75 100 100 — 4 250 33 — 50 60 75 — 60 75 100 — 125 150 200 125 150 200 — 5 400 72 (25 in. W) 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V .33 1 3 5 .33 1 3 7.5 1 3 7.5 10 — 10 — — 10 15 — 25 Power Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled Full Voltage Reversing Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers FVR vacuum contactor combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVR vacuum starters with circuit breaker disconnects use thermal magnetic circuit breakers and melting alloy overloads. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 600 V NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps 240 V 480 V 30 – 75 – 125 – 40 – 100 150 40 – – – – 50 100 – 200 – – – 125 200 200 50 – – 150 – 60 125 – 60 75 150 200 4 5 175 225 250 75 – – – 300 – 100 200 – 350 Space (Inches) Power Bus Connection 33 Plug-on 72 (20 in. W X 20 in. D) Cabled 38 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers All Compac 6 application-rated six inch units with circuit breaker disconnects include TeSys™ D-Line contactors (IEC rated), G frame magnetic only adjustable instantaneous trip breakers, and Class 10 ambient compensated bimetallic overload relays. Compac 6 application-rated six inch units will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep Model 6 sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a Model 6 vertical section. Select application rated units based on motor full load amps and system voltage. Application-rated FVR Combination Starters with Magnetic Only Circuit Breaker (480 V Max.) Starter Ampacity Range AC-3 Duty IEC Contactor Overload Relay 208 V 240 V 480 V 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 LRD05 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 LRD06 1.6 to 2.1 1.6 to 2.1 1.6 to 2.1 LRD07 2.1 to 2.5 2.1 to 2.5 2.1 to 2.5 LRD07 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 4.8 4.0 to 4.8 4.0 to 4.8 LRD10 4.8 to 5.5 4.8 to 5.5 4.8 to 5.5 LRD10 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 LRD12 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 7.6 LRD14 9.0 to 11 9.0 to 9.6 — LRD16 — — 7.6 to 9.0 LRD14 LRD08 C/B Amps Space Bus (Inches) Connection 3 7 LC2D18 6 Plug-on 15 11/03 — 9.6 to 11 9.0 to 11.0 11 to 12 11 to 12 11 to 12 LRD16 12 to 17.5 12 to 17.5 12 to 14 LRD21 17.5 to 22 17.5 to 22 — LRD22 LC2D32 LRD16 30 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 39 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) Starters with Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers RVAT combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Sections with RVAT starters require single shipping splits. All RVAT starter units with circuit breaker disconnects use thermal magnetic circuit breakers and are UL Listed. Motor Control Center unit short circuit ratings to 100 kA are available. See short circuit current rating section for details. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V — — 15 20 — — 20 25 — 30 40 50 30 40 50 — — 25 30 — 40 — — 30 — 40 — 50 50 — 60 75 — — 60 75 — 100 — 125 150 — 200 150 — 200 — — — 100 — 125 150 — — 125 — 150 — 200 — 250 — 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 — — — 60 75 — — 100 60 75 — 100 — — NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps Space (Inches) 3 60 80 90 100 48 4 100 110 125 150 175 200 60 5 200 225 250 300 350 72 (25 in. W x 20 in. D) 6 350 450 500 600 700 800 Power Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled 72 (30 in. W x 20 in. D) Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Vacuum Starters with Circuit Breakers RVAT vacuum combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Sections with RVAT starters require single shipping splits. All RVAT vacuum starters with circuit breaker disconnects use thermal magnetic circuit breakers and melting alloy overloads. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V … 25 30 … 40 … … 30 … 40 … 50 … 60 75 … … 100 60 75 … 100 … … 50 … 60 75 … 60 75 … 100 … 125 150 … 200 150 … 200 … … … 100 … 125 150 … … 125 … 150 … 200 … 250 … 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 … … NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps Space (Inches) Power Bus Connection 4 100 110 125 150 175 200 60 Plug-on 5① 200 225 250 300 350 72 (25 in. x 20 in. D) 6① 350 450 500 600 700 800 Cabled 72 (30 in. x 20 in. D) ① Non UL Listed 40 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Reduced Voltage 2-Step Part-winding (RVPW) Starters with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers Part-winding starters use a separate Mag-Gard circuit breaker for each of the two motor windings. Each circuit breaker has an external operating mechanism. Part-winding starters require 6 thermal units. Starter Type and Horsepower NEMA Size C/B Amps Space (Inches) 3 10 15 — 1 3 7 15 30 30 — 30 40 20 40 — 2 15 30 50 30 230 50 60 75 75 — 3 50 100 36 50 60 75 — 60 75 100 125 150 100 125 150 4 250 54 100 125 — 150 100 125 150 — 200 250 300 350 200 250 300 350 5 400 72 (25 in. W x 20 in. D) 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 1 3 7.5 10 1.5 3 7.5 10 2 7.5 15 — — 15 20 — 15 25 25 40 Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled Full Voltage 2-Speed 1-Winding Starters (Consequent Pole) with Mag-Gard Circuit Breakers Motor windings are Wye connected as standard. Open Delta connection is available. Starter Type and Horsepower Constant Horsepower Constant or Variable Torque NEMA C/B Space Size Amps (Inches) 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V — 0.75 2 5 — 0.75 2 5 .5 2 5 7.5 0.75 2 5 7.5 0.33 1 3 5 0.33 1 3 7.5 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 7 15 30 21 — 7.5 — — 10 — 10 20 — 15 20 — — 10 — — 10 15 15 25 — 20 25 — 2 30 50 100 24 — 20 — 25 — 40 25 40 — 25 — 30 — 50 30 50 3 50 100 51 ➀ — 25 30 — 30 40 50 60 75 60 75 — — 30 40 — 40 50 — 75 100 — 100 — 4 250 60 40 — 50 60 50 — 60 75 100 — 125 150 100 125 — 150 50 — 60 75 — 60 75 100 — 125 150 200 125 150 — 200 5 Bus Connection Plug-on 400 72 (25 in. W) Cabled ➀ When ambient compensated bimetallic overload relay is used, 60 in. of mounting space is required. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 41 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Full Voltage 2-Speed 2-Winding Starters (Separate Winding) with Mag-Gard® Circuit Breakers Starter Type and Horsepower Constant Horsepower Constant or Variable Torque NEMA C/B Space Size Amps (Inches) 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V — 0.75 2 5 — 0.75 2 5 0.5 2 5 7.5 0.75 2 5 7.5 0.33 1 3 5 0.33 1 3 7.5 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 7.5 10 1 3 7 15 30 21 — 7.5 — — 10 — 10 20 — 15 20 — — 10 — — 10 15 15 25 — 20 25 — 2 30 50 100 24 — I20 — 25 — 40 25 40 — 25 — 30 — 50 30 50 3 50 30 — 25 30 — 30 40 50 60 75 60 75 — — 30 40 — 40 50 — 75 100 — 100 — 4 250 33 — 40 50 60 — 50 60 75 — 100 125 150 100 125 — 150 50 — 60 75 — 60 75 100 — 125 150 200 125 150 — 200 5 400 72 (25 in. W) Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled Full Voltage 2-Speed Reversing Starters with Circuit Breakers This chart lists the option to provide reversing contactors and control to a standard 2-Speed starter. To size a 2-Speed reversing starter, select the appropriate 2-Speed Starter from the previous tables (1- or 2-Winding; constant horsepower, constant or variable torque). Add the required space (inches) from the chart below. The reversing contactors will be the same NEMA/EEMAC size as the 2-Speed Starter Contactor. The control Circuit/Control Circuit Transformer should be sized for the additional contactor load. Add Reversing to 2-Speed Starter Application Reversing in both speeds Reversing in low seed only Reversing in high speed only ➀ 2-Speed Starter Size Space (Inches) 1 12 2 12 3 18 4 ➀ 24 25 in. wide section required when a circuit breaker disconnect is used. 42 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Wye-Delta Closed Transition Starters with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers (Non-UL Listed) Starter Type and Horsepower ➁ 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 1.5 2 3 5 — 7.5 10 2 3 5 — 7.5 10 — 5 7.5 10 15 — — — 5 7.5 10 15 — — — — — — 15 25 — — — 15 25 — 20 25 30 40 20 30 — 40 — ➀ ➁ 11/03 C/B NEMA Size Frame Amps 1 2 — — 50 50 25 — 30 40 — — 30 40 — 50 — 75 — — — — 75 — — — — — — 100 — 50 — 60 — — 75 — 100 — 150 — — 150 — — — 75 — 125 150 — 100 125 150 — — 250 — 300 — 250 300 — — — 5 — — — — — 350 350 400 — 300 250 300 200 250 300 350 400 500 — 600 500 600 700 — Space ➀ (Inches) FA 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 60 FA 40 60 70 90 100 66 FA 100 KA 110 125 150 175 200 3 Plug-on 72 (30 W) KA 150 LA 175 225 250 300 LA 300 350 400 MA 500 600 6 MA 500 600 Three full sections required 2 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) 6 MA 700 800 900 1000 Three full sections required 1 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (25 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) 4 Bus Connection Two full sections required 2 at (20 W x 20 D) Cabled Two full sections required 1 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) Space requirements listed are for resistor banks that meet standard Wye-Delta starting characteristics. Additional space may be required for other Wye-Delta applications. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for layout and pricing information. Wye-Delta starter motor information sheet required with each Wye-Delta starter. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for additional information. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 43 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Wye-Delta Open Transition Starters with Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers (Non-UL Listed) Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ NEMA C/B Size 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V Frame Amps ➀ 1.5 2 3 5 — 7.5 10 2 3 5 — 7.5 10 — 5 7.5 10 15 — — — 5 7.5 10 15 — — — — — — 15 20 — — — 15 25 — 20 25 30 40 20 30 — 40 — — — 50 50 25 — 30 40 — — 30 40 — 50 — 75 — — — — 75 — — — — — — 100 — 50 — 60 — — 75 — 100 — 150 — — 150 — — — 75 100 — 100 125 — 250 — 250 300 — 125 150 150 — 300 — — — — — — — — 350 350 400 — 200 250 300 200 250 300 350 400 500 — 600 500 600 700 — 1 2 Space (Inches) FA 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 24 FA 40 60 70 90 100 30 FA 100 KA 110 125 150 175 200 KA 150 LA 175 225 250 300 LA 300 350 400 3 4 5 Bus Connection Plug-on 42 72 (20 W) 72 (30 W) MA 500 600 6 MA 500 600 Two full sections required: 1 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) 6 MA 700 800 900 1000 Two full sections required: 1 at (25 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) Cabled Wye-Delta starter motor information sheet required with each Wye-Delta starter. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for additional information. 44 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects FVNR combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVNR starter units with fusible switch disconnects are provided with Class H fuse clips. Class R fuse clips can be provided at no additional charge. Fusible disconnect combination starters Sizes 5 and 6 use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. All Compac 6 NEMA/EEMAC rated six inch units use Class J fuses. Compac 6 units mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a Model 6 vertical section. Motor Control Center unit short circuit current ratings to 100 kA are available. See short circuit current rating section for details. 208 V Starter Type and Horsepower 240 V 480 V 600 V 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 20 25 40 75 5 7.5 .5 7.5 15 25 30 50 100 10 — 10 — 25 50 — 100 200 10 — 10 — 25 50 — 100 200 150 200 400 400 NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) 6 (Compac 6) 4 5 30 60 30 60 60 100 200 200 400 6 600 1 1 2 3 Bus Connection 12 12 18 30 30 72 72 (30 in. W x 20 in. D) Plug-on Cabled Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects FVNR vacuum combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVNR vacuum starters with fusible disconnects are provided with Class J fuse clips. Fusible disconnect combination starters Sizes 5 and 6 use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips and are UL Listed. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. MCC unit short circuit current ratings to 100,000 A are available. Starter Type and Horsepower 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size Standard C/B Amps 40 50 100 100 4 75 100 200 200 5 150 200 400 400 6 208 V 11/03 Space (Inches) Power Bus Connection 200 30 Plug-on 400 72 (25 in. W) 600 72 (30 in. W) Cabled © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 45 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Non-reversing with Fusible Disconnects All Compac 6 application-rated six inch units with fusible switch disconnects include TeSys™ D-Line contactors (IEC rated), Class J fuse clips, and Class 10 ambient compensated bimetallic overload relays. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Compac 6 application-rated six inch units will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a vertical section. Select application rated units based on system voltage and motor full load amps. Application-rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing Combination Starters with Fusible Disconnects (600 V Max. – Class J Only) Starter Ampacity Range 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 0.63 to 1.0 1.0 to 1.6 1.6 to 2.5 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 7.0 7.0 to 9.0 9.0 to 11 — — 11 to 12 12 to 17.5 17.5 to 22 — — 22 to 23 23 to 30 30 to 37 37 to 42 0.63 to 1.0 1.0 to 1.6 1.6 to 2.5 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 7.0 7.0 to 9.0 9.0 to 9.6 — — 9.6 to 12 12 to 17.5 17.5 to 22 — — 22 to 23 23 to 30 30 to 37 37 to 42 0.63 to 1.0 1.0 to 1.6 1.6 to 2.5 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 7.0 7.0 to 7.6 0.63 to 1.0 1.0 to 1.6 1.6 to 2.5 2.5 to 4.0 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 7.0 — — 6.1 to 7.0 7.0 to 9.0 9.0 to 11 — — 11 to 12 12 to 17 17 to 23 23 to 27 — — — 7.6 to 9.0 9.0 to 12 12 to 14 — — 14 to 17 17 to 23 23 to 30 30 to 34 — AC-3 Duty IEC Contactor LC1D18 LC1D32 LC1D50 Overload Relay F/S Amps LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 Space Bus (Inches) Connection 30 6 Plug-on 60 Full Voltage Reversing (FVR) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects FVR combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. All FVR starter units with fusible switch disconnects are provided with Class H fuse clips. Class R fuse clips can be provided at no additional charge. Fusible disconnect combination starter Sizes 5 and 6 use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Motor Control Center unit short circuit current ratings to 100 kA are available. See short circuit current rating section for details. Starter Type and Horsepower NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) 10 … 1 30 60 18 25 25 2 60 25 50 50 3 100 40 50 100 100 4 200 39 75 100 200 200 5 400 72 (25 in. W) 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 … 10 15 20 Bus Connection Plug-on 27 Cabled 46 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Full Voltage Reversing Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects Vacuum combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep sections. All FVR vacuum starter units with fusible disconnects are provided with Class J fuse clips. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. These starters use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips. These units are NOT UL Listed. Starter Type and Horsepower 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size F/S Amps 40 50 100 100 4 75 100 200 200 5 208 V Space (Inches) Bus Connection 200 39 Plug-on 400 72 (25 in. W) Cabled Application-Rated Compac 6 Units – Full Voltage Reversing with Fusible Disconnects All Compac 6 application-rated six inch units with fusible switch disconnects include TeSys™ D-Line contactors (IEC rated), Class J fuse clips, and Class 10 ambient compensated bimetallic overload relays. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Compac 6 application-rated six inch units will mount in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep Model 6 sections. Up to twelve Compac 6 units can be installed in a Model 6 vertical section. Select application rated units based on system voltage and motor full load amps. Application-rated Full Voltage Reversing Combination Starters with Fusible Disconnects (600 V Max. – Class J Only) Starter Ampacity Range AC-3 Duty IEC Contactor Overload Relay 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 0.63 to 1.0 LRD05 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 1.0 to 1.6 LRD06 1.6 to 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 LRD07 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 2.5 to 4.0 F/S Amps Space Bus (Inches) Connection LRD08 LC2D18 4.0 to 5.5 4.0 to 5.5 4.0 to 5.5 4.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 7.0 5.5 to 6.1 LRD10 LRD12 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 9.0 7.0 to 7.6 — LRD14 9.0 to 11 9.0 to 9.6 — — LRD16 — — — 6.1 to 7.0 LRD12 — — — 7.0 to 9.0 — — 7.6 to 9.0 11 to 12 9.6 to 12 9.0 to 12 9.0 to 11 LRD16 12 to 17.5 12 to 17.5 12 to 14 — LRD21 17.5 to 22 17.5 to 22 — — LRD22 30 6 Plug-on LRD12 LRD14 LC2D32 11/03 60 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 47 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Reduced Voltage Autotransformer (RVAT) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects RVAT combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Sections with RVAT starters require single shipping splits. All RVAT starter units with fusible disconnects are provided with Class H fuse clips. Class R fuse clips can be provided at no additional charge. Fusible disconnect combination starters Sizes 5 and 6 use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Motor Control Center unit short circuit current ratings to 100 kA are available. See short circuit current rating section for details. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 240 V 20 25 40 50 75 100 150 200 600 V NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) Bus Connection 50 50 3 100 54 Plug-on 100 100 4 200 72 200 200 5 400 72 (25 in. W x 20 in. D) 400 400 6 600 72 (50 in. W x 20 in. D) 480 V Cabled Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Vacuum Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects RVAT combination starters will mount in 20 in. wide by 20 in. deep sections, except where noted. Sections with RVAT require single shipping splits. Provided with Class J fuse clips. Fusible disconnect combination starter Sizes 5 and 6 use molded case automatic circuit interrupters in series with fuse clips. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. These units are NOT UL Listed. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) 40 50 100 100 4 200 72 75 100 200 200 5 400 72 (25 in. W x 20 in. D) 150 200 400 400 6 600 72 (50 in. W x 20 in. D) Bus Connection Cabled Reduced Voltage 2-step Part-winding (RVPW) Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed) Part-winding starters use a fusible disconnect with separate fuse clips for each of the two motor windings. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Part-winding starters require 6 thermal units. Starter Type and Horsepower 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) 10 10 15 15 1 30 30 20 25 40 40 2 60 30 40 50 75 75 3 100 42 75 75 150 150 4 200 66 150 150 350 350 5 400 72 (25 in. W) Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled 48 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Combination Starter Units Application and General Information Full Voltage 2-Speed 1-Winding Starters (Consequent Pole) with Fusible Switch Disconnects Motor windings are Wye connected as standard. Available as Open Delta connected. Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Starter Type and Horsepower Constant Horsepower ➀ NEMA F/S Size Amps Constant or Variable Torque 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 5 — 5 — 7.5 — 7.5 — 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 — 10 — 1 Space (Inches) 30 60 Bus Connection 21 7.5 10 20 20 10 15 25 25 2 60 24 20 25 40 40 25 30 50 50 3 100 51 ➀ 30 40 75 75 40 50 100 100 4 200 66 60 75 150 150 75 100 200 200 5 400 72 (25 in. W) Plug-on Cabled When ambient compensated bimetallic overload relay is used, 60 in. of mounting space is required. Full Voltage 2-Speed 2-Winding Starters (Separate Winding) with Fusible Switch Disconnects Do not use renewable link fuses in fused switches. Starter Type and Horsepower Constant Horsepower NEMA F/S Space Size Amps (Inches) Constant or Variable Torque 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 5 — 5 — 7.5 — 7.5 — 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 — 10 — 1 30 60 21 7.5 10 20 20 10 15 25 25 2 60 24 20 25 40 40 25 30 50 50 3 100 30 30 40 75 75 40 50 100 100 4 200 39 400 72 (25 in. W) 60 75 150 150 75 100 200 200 5 Bus Connection Plug-on Cabled Full Voltage 2-Speed Reversing Starters This chart lists the option to provide reversing contactors and control to a standard 2-Speed starter. To size a 2-Speed reversing starter, select the appropriate 2-Speed Starter (1- or 2-Winding; constant horsepower or constant or variable torque). Add the required space (inches) from the chart below. The reversing contactors will be the same NEMA/EEMAC size as the 2-Speed Starter Contactor. The Control Circuit and Control Circuit Transformer should be sized for the additional contactor load. Add Reversing to 2-speed Starter Application Reversing in both speeds Reversing in low speed only Reversing in high speed only 11/03 2-speed Starter Size Space (Inches) 1 12 2 12 3 18 4 24 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 49 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Combination Starter Units Wye-Delta Closed Transition Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed) Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ NEMA F/S Size Amps Space (Inches) ➁ 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 10 10 15 15 1 60 60 20 25 40 40 2 100 66 40 50 75 75 3 200 72 (30W) Bus Connection Plug-on ➀ ➁ 60 75 150 150 4 400 Two full sections required 1 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) 150 150 300 300 5 600 Three full sections required 2 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) 300 350 600 700 6 800 Three full sections required 2 at (20 W x 20 D) 1 at (35 W x 20 D) Cabled Wye-Delta starter motor information sheet required with each Wye-Delta starter. Space requirements listed are for resistor banks that meet standard Wye-Delta starting characteristics. Additional space may be required for other Wye-Delta applications. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for layout and pricing information. Wye-Delta Open Transition Starters with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Non-UL Listed) Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Size F/S Amps Space (Inches) 10 10 15 15 1 60 30 20 25 40 40 2 100 42 40 50 75 75 3 200 60 75 150 150 4 400 50 150 300 300 5 600 72 (30 W) 800 Two full sections required: 1 at (25 W x 20 D) 1 at (30 W x 20 D) Bus Connection Plug-on 72 (20 W) 300 ➀ 350 600 700 6 Cabled Wye-Delta starter motor information sheet required with each Wye-Delta starter. 50 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Unit Options Application and General Information Unit Options Unit Nameplates White letters on a gray background are standard. Description Application Space (Inches) White letters on gray (standard) Black letters on white Unit nameplate engraved (1.5 in. x 6.25 in.) 0 White letters on black White letters on red White letters on gray Black letters on white Master nameplate engraved (8 in. x 10 in.) 0 White letters on black White letters on red Control Circuit Variations Space (Inches) Description Application Unfused separate 120 V control circuit with control power disconnect Standard on all starters unless FT is chosen. (All Size 6 starters have FT as standard.) Fused separate 120 V control circuit with control power disconnect Includes one fuse and control circuit interlock. 0 0 Fused line voltage control circuit (two primary fuses) Control power taken between phases Operating mechanism interlock ➃ (Add to Form FT) SPDT Control power taken from phase and neutral DPDT 0 50 VA (23), 100 VA (73), 150 VA (123) Size 1 FVNR Fused control power transformer (two primary and one secondary fuse supplied as standard) FT = Standard capacity T1 = 50 VA additional capacity T2 = 100 VA additional capacity T3 = 150 VA additional capacity T4 = 300 VA additional capacity) Size 1 FVR and 2-speed; All Size 2 6 0 All Size 3, except 2-speed 1-winding 150 VA (62), 300 VA (253) All Size 4 and Size 3 2-speed 1-winding 300 VA (211), 500 VA (411) 0 750 VA (661) 9 All Size 5 and all RVAT (use line voltage coil with interposing relay) 500 VA (453) 9 50 VA (25), 100 VA (75), 150 VA (125), 300 VA (275) ➁, 500 VA (475) ➂ All Size 6 Transient Suppression Module 300 VA (273) 100 VA (62), 150 VA (112), 300 VA (262) ➀ 150 VA (15) STD, 300 VA (165), 450 VA (315) 0 Size 1 – 5 starters (maximum coil voltage = 120 V) VA rating shown in parentheses ( ) is the excess capacity for other control devices after subtracting the contactor requirements. ➀ 6 in. required on Size 1 2-speed and all Size 2 starters. ➁ 6 in. required on Size 1 – 3 RVAT and RVPW. ➂ 9 in. required on Size 1 – 3 RVAT and RVPW. ➃ Not suitable for use as power source loss indication. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 51 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Unit Options Pilot Devices Model 6 Motor Control Centers use Type XB5 22 mm pilot devices as standard. (Class 9001 Type K 30 mm or XB4 22mm are available options.) Starters are provided with a removable hinged station plate that has five knockouts for XB5 devices (maximum of three Type K 30 mm). Compac 6 units are provided with a control station plate that has knockouts for four Class 9001 Type XB5 22 mm pilot devices. (Class 9001 Type K devices can not be substituted on Compac 6 units.) Control Station Plate NOTE: When more pilot devices are specified than will fit in the station plate, the additional devices will be mounted directly in the unit door. (Not applicable to Compac 6 units.) Description Start-stop push button Forward-reverse-stop push button High-low-stop push button Fast-off slow push button High-low push button Fast-slow push button On-off push button Single-function push button Illuminated push button Maintained contact push button H-O-A selector switch Start-stop selector switch On-auto selector switch On-off selector switch High-off-low selector switch Hand-auto selector switch Test-auto selector switch Forward-off-reverse selector switch High-low selector switch Slow-off-fast selector switch Slow-fast selector switch Forward-reverse selector switch High-low-off selector switch Four-position selector switch Switchboard type rotary cam selector switch Substitute Type K pilot devices (N/A for some unit types) Addition of dust boots to above pilot devices Omit control station plate (solid steel unit door) Application FVNR, RVAT Any other starter FVR 2-speed 2-speed 2-speed 2-speed Any starter Any starter Any starter Any starter FVNR, RVAT Any other starter FVNR, RVAT, RVPW Any starter FVNR Any other starter 2-speed Any starter Any starter FVR 2-speed 2-speed 2-speed FVR 2-speed Any starter-Type K operators 2-circuits or less Each additional circuit Any starter (Max. 3 Type K devices) Any starter Units without pilot devices Units with pilot devices (door mounted) Space (Inches) 0 6 0 52 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Unit Options Application and General Information Pilot Lights Model 6 Motor Control Centers use Type XB5 22mm pilot devices as standard. (Class 9001 Type K 30 mm or XB4 22mm are available options.) Starters are provided with a removable hinged station plate that has five knockouts for XB5 devices (maximum of three Type K 30 mm). Compac 6 units are provided with a control station plate that has knockouts for four class 9001 Type XB5 22 mm pilot devices. (Class 9001 Type K devices can not be substituted on Compac 6 units.) NOTE: When more pilot devices are specified than will fit in the station plate, the additional devices will be mounted directly in the unit door. (Not applicable to Compac 6 UNITS.) Description Application Red “on” Green “off” Green “on” Pilot lights Red “off” Special pilot light configurations ➀➁ Red “on” Green “off” Push-to-test pilot lights (N/A on Compac 6) Green “on” Red “off” Special pilot light configurations ➀➁ ➀ ➁ 11/03 FVNR, RVAT, RVPW FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) Wye delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT, RVPW Wye delta FVNR, RVAT, RVPW FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye delta Red Green Any starter Yellow Blue White FVNR, RVAT, RVPW FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) Wye delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT, RVPW Wye delta FVNR, RVAT, RVPW FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye delta Red Green Any starter Yellow Blue White Space (Inches) 0 Any starter application requires a diagram with order entry. Other pilot light configurations can be provided with a minimum shipping code of F. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 53 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Unit Options LED Pilot Lights Model 6 Motor Control Centers use Type XB5 22mm LED pilot devices when requested. Description Red “on” Green “off” LED pilot lights Green “on” Red “off” Special pilot light configurations ➀➁ Red “on” Green “off” Push-to-test LED pilot lights (not available on Compac 6 units) Green “on” Red “off” Special pilot light configurations ➀➁ Substitute Type K pilot devices (N/A on Compac 6) ➀ ➁ Space (Inches) Application FVNR, RVAT FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, RVAT FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye-delta Any starter Red Green Amber FVNR, RVAT FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, RVAT FVR, 2-speed (includes two lights) RVPW, Wye-delta FVNR, FVR, 2-speed, RVAT RVPW, Wye-delta Any starter 0 Red Green Amber Any starter (Max. 3 Type K Devices) Any starter application requires a diagram with order entry. Other pilot light configurations can be provided. 54 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Unit Options Application and General Information Overload Relays Model 6 motor control center units with Type S starters are available in NEMA/EEMAC Sizes 1 through 6. Type S starters are provided with melting alloy overload relay blocks as standard. Their trip-free construction allows the overload relay to trip even if the reset lever is blocked or held in the reset position. Features such as the trip-to-test and the visible trip indicator minimizes troubleshooting time. With these features and state-of-the-art design, the Model 6 starter unit has earned a solid reputation that no other NEMA/EEMAC starter can equal. Schneider Electric has added the solid state motor overload protection to its existing family of overload relay protection equipment, including melting alloy and bimetallic devices. Technological migration allows Schneider Electric customers the ability to make the same space “smarter,” while preserving backward compatibility. The Motor Logic® Solid State Overload Relay is available as a separately mounted device, or as a replacement overload relay for existing NEMA/EEMAC Type S starters in any of the open or enclosed configurations. Description Space (Inches) Application Melting alloy overload relay All starters Size 1–2 all Ambient compensated bimetallic overload relay Size 3–4 all Size 5–6 all Motor Logic Size 1–7 FVNR and Solid state overload relay FVR starters Isolated alarm contact Melting alloy only Overload alarm light (amber) ➀ Melting alloy, bimetal Melting alloy, bimetal Overload alarm light – LED (amber) ➀ Converts combination starter to combination Omit overload relay contactor. Omit external overload reset button — Size 1 starters Size 2 starters Additional overload relay (See NEC 430-53 for proper application) Size 3 starters Size 4 starters All standard melting alloy and bimetal thermal units (set of 3) Factory-installed thermal units ➁ ➂ (Will be sized per NEC 430-150, unless full load currents are Type FB quick trip provided) (set of 3) Type SB slow trip (set of 3) ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ 11/03 0➃ 0 0 0 0 6 6 9 12 0 Not available on Size 3 & 4 starters with bimetal overload. Order must include thermal unit selection or motor full load current ratings. 2-Speed and Part-Winding starters require six (6) thermal units. Size 3, 2-Speed, 1-Winding requires 9 in. space adder. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 55 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Unit Options Motor Logic® Solid State Overload Relays (SSOLR) The Motor Logic solid state overload relay is available in separate Class 10 or 20 trip ratings or as a combined switch selectable trip Class 10 or 20. The solid state design of Motor Logic provides phase loss and phase unbalance and repeat trip accuracy of ±2%. These relays are direct replacements on existing melting alloy and bimetallic devices. Below is a typical control diagram using a solid state overload relay. Unit with Motor Logic Solid State Overload Relay L1 T1 M .NS1NS1 S To Source L2 L3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect M T2 M T3 Motor Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 H2 H1 Circuitry CPT MOTOR LOGIC (SSOLR) X2 X1 Motor Logic Solid State Overload Relay “Base Unit” Stop Start M Ground M SSOLR C Trip Typical Control Diagram Some of the functionalities of the solid state overload relay are noted below: Overload Trip Function A trip will be initiated if the phase currents exceed 125% of the trip current adjustment dial setting on the front of the device. The time to trip will depend on: • Level of monitored currents • Trip Class of the device (Class 10 or Class 20) • Length of time since last trip The trip function is an inverse time function - the device trips quicker at higher current levels than at lower current levels. The overload relay is designed to meet the NEMA/EEMAC standards for a 1.15 service factor motor. This means the overload relay must not trip for currents that are 100% of its current adjustment dial setting, and that it must trip for currents that are 125% of its current adjustment dial setting. Phase Loss / Phase Unbalance Relays The phase loss / phase unbalance circuitry initiates a trip within three seconds if: • A phase unbalance occurs when current in any one phase of a three phase motor drops significantly below the current being carried by the other two phases. The threshold is 25% between the phases before a trip is initiated. • A phase loss occurs when current in any one phase of a three phase motor is completely lost during running of the motor. 56 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Unit Options Application and General Information The phase loss / phase unbalance circuitry can detect a phase loss in either the primary or secondary of a wye-delta or delta-wye transformer. The phase loss / phase unbalance trip function is fully operational at currents as low as 75% of the minimum marked dial setting on the device and provides protection for lightly loaded motors. Motor Logic® Overload Relays ➀ Application FVNR FVR RVAT Amp Range HP at 208 V HP at 240 V HP at 480 V HP at 600 V 1.5–4.5 0.5–0.75 1–3 0.25–0.5 1.5–4.5 3–9 6–18 9–27 NEMA Size Contactor with Motor Logic 0.5–0.75 1–2 1.5–3 1/00B 0.33–0.5 0.75–1 1–1.5 1/00C (3 Pass) 0.75 0.75–1 1.5–2 2–3 1/00C (2 Pass) 1–2 1.5–2 3–5 5 1/00C, 2/00C 3 3 7.5 7.5–10 1/0, 2/0 5 5–7.5 10 — 1/1 15–45 7.5–10 10 15–25 15–25 2/2 30–90 15–20 15–30 30–50 30–50 3/3 45–135 25–40 40–50 60–100 60–100 4/4 90–270 50–75 60–100 125–200 125–200 5/0 with CTs 180–540 100–150 125–200 250–400 250–400 6/0 with CTs 9–27 — — — — 2/1 30–90 — — — — 4/3 2-SPD ➀ 45–135 — — — — 5/4 90–270 — — — — 6/00C with CTs Thermal magnetic disconnects are supplied as standard. Mag-Gard® circuit breakers are available. Motor Logic Plus Solid State Overload Relays Motor Logic Plus solid state overload relays are available as starter options in our Intelligent Motor Control Center (IMCC) sections. The Motor Logic Plus is a fully programmable overload relay designed to monitor three-phase AC motor systems. A Modbus® communications module is provided as a standard with Motor Logic Plus in MCCs. DeviceNet communications is available as a option. Some of the functionalities of the Motor Logic Plus are: • • • • • High voltage Low voltage Voltage unbalance Current unbalance Single phasing • • • • • Phase reversal Overload Rapid cycling Class II ground fault Jam • • • • Trip class (5, 10, 15, 20, 30) Under current Fault history (last 4 faults) Power factor Motor Logic Plus Overload Relays Application FVNR FVR RVAT 11/03 Amp Range HP at 208 V HP at 240 V HP at 480 V HP at 600 V NEMA Size Contactor with Motor Logic Plus 0.5–2.3 – 0.5 0.5–1 0.5–1 1/B2 2–9 0.5–1.5 0.75–2 1.5–3 2–5 1/B3 6–27 2–7.5 3–7.5 5–10 7.5–10 1/B4 10–45 10 10–15 15–25 15–25 2/B5 20–90 15–25 20–30 30–50 30–50 3/B6 60–135 30–40 40–50 60–100 60–100 4/B7 120–270 50–75 60–100 125–200 125–200 5/B8 240–540 100–150 125–200 250–400 250–400 6/B9 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 57 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Unit Options Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks ➀ Max. Aux. Interlocks Per Contactor Type Size Description Qty. 1–2 4 3–6 4 FVNR Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks 2 4 3–5 2 1–4 2 CHP: High 1–2 4 3–4 2 CVT: Low 1–2 4 3–4 2 1–4 2 1–2 4 3 3 4 2 3–6 5 FVR ➁ 2-speed 1-winding CHP: Low CVT: High 2-speed 2-winding RVAT ➀ ➁ When the starter has more than one contactor (FVR, RVAT, 2-Speed), indicate which contactor receives the interlock. Elapsed Time Meters, Transient Suppression Module, and Off Pilot Light use one auxiliary interlock each. Size 1 starters with three auxiliary interlocks require a minimum 100 VA control power transformer. Maximum of 2 interlocks per contactor for Compac 6 units. Circuit Breaker Options Description Application Space (Inches) FA branch to FH KA branch to KH Substitute high interrupting circuit breaker for standard circuit breaker➀ LA branch to LH (part-winding starters require two high IC circuit breakers) MA branch to MH 0 PA branch to PH Substitute extra-high interrupting circuit breaker for standard circuit breaker (feeders only: 480 V max.) ➀ FA branch to FC KH main or KA branch to KC 0 6 Substitute thermal-magnetic circuit breaker for Mag-Gard® ➀ All starters (include actual HP information) 0 MA/MH to MX without ground fault ➁ Substitute electronic trip circuit breaker ➀ for standard circuit breaker PA/PH to PX without ground fault MA/MH to ME without ground fault ➁ PA/PH to PE without ground fault Circuit breaker shunt trip Any unit with a circuit breaker (1021) Circuit breaker undervoltage trip ➂ Any unit with a circuit breaker (1121) Circuit breaker internal interlock Any unit with a circuit breaker (1212) Circuit breaker alarm contact Any unit with a circuit breaker (2100) 0 Size 1 and 2 C/B starters (Mag-Gard) Current limiting module ➀ (part-winding starters require two current limiting modules) Size 3 C/B starters (Mag-Gard) 15–30 A branch breaker (add high-interrupting circuit breaker) 0 35–100 A branch breaker (add high-interrupting circuit breaker) Current limiting fuses added to ➀ Size 4 Mag-Gard combination starter Size 4 C/B FVNR, FVR, 2-speed Size 4 C/B, RVAT 24 Size 4 C/B part-winding Key interlock (single cylinder) Per lock on any device 0 58 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Unit Options Application and General Information Description ➀ ➁ ➂ Space (Inches) Application Reference pages 113 through 115 for short circuit current rating information. 800 A maximum. Used in limited applications. Fusible Switch Options Space (Inches) Description Application Class R fuse clips ➀➁ 30–600 A fusible switches Size 1–6 fusible starters (standard) 0 30–400 A fusible switches Class J fuse clip spacing ➀ 0 600 A fusible switches Size 1, 5, 6 fusible starters Next larger size Class J fuse clips ➀➁ Next smaller size fuse clips ➁ Key interlock (single cylinder) ➁ ➀ ➁ 0 Size 2, 3 fusible starters 6 Size 4 starters 12 Size 4 or larger fusible starters 0 Size 3 or smaller fusible starters Per lock/per switch 0 Reference pages 113 through 115 for short circuit current rating information. Not available on Compac 6 Units. Ground Fault Options Description Application Space (Inches) Size 1–2 starter GA 6 Size 3 starter GA 9 Size 4–5 starter GA 12 Size 6 starter GA 0 ME C/B 0 Size 6 autotransformer 15–225 A branch circuit breaker 200 A branch fusible switch 125–225 A main circuit breaker 200 A main fusible switch GFM 6 GA 6 GFM 6 GA 6 Ground fault protection 400 A main or branch C/B or switch MX C/B 6➀ 600 A main or branch C/B or switch MX C/B 0 800 A main or branch C/B or switch MX C/B 0 400 A main or branch C/B or switch ME C/B 9➀ 600 A main or branch C/B or switch ME C/B 800 A main or branch C/B or switch ME C/B 1000 A main or branch PX C/B ➀ 11/03 Ground Fault Type 1200–2000 A main or branch PX C/B 1000 A main or branch PE C/B 1200–2000 A main or branch PE C/B 0 0 (30W) Only 3 in. of space required if top-located main breaker. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 59 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Unit Options Wiring Options Description Control and Power Terminal Blocks Additional terminal blocks NOTE: Max. 20 control terminals per unit. (12 max. with power terminals) Power terminal blocks (will reduce max. control terminals from 20 to 12) Application All starters - unwired (per terminal point) 0 All starters - wired (per terminal point) 0 Size 1 and 2 starters 0 Size 3 starters #14 AWG Type MTW Starter control wiring; size and type ➀ Space (Inches) 0 #12 AWG Type MTW 0 #14 AWG Type SIS #12 AWG Type SIS 0 Standard wire labels - plastic sleeve All starter control wiring Square D Numbering 0 Custom wire labels - plastic sleeve All starter control wiring user defined (13 characters max.) Ring tongue terminals ➁ All starter control wiring Copper crimp lugs (for customer connections only; cable sizes must be provided) 0 Main lug compartments 0 Size 1–4 starters ➂ 0 15–100 A branches 3 110–225 A branches 0 All other units Special wire colors - 3 max. All starter control wiring 0 Size 1 and 2 starters NEMA/EEMAC type C wiring Size 3 starters 0 Size 4 and 5 starters ➀ ➁ ➂ Not applicable to Compac 6, Altivar®, or Altistart® units that use #16 AWG (or smaller) MTW wire. Provided where possible and allowed by UL procedure. Not UL Listed. 60 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Miscellaneous Units Application and General Information Miscellaneous Units Distribution Transformers Distribution transformers are provided with primary circuit breaker or fusible switch. 150 °C temperature rise transformers are supplied as standard. Single phase 5 kVA and 10 kVA transformers may be mounted in a 20 in. W x 15 in. or 20 in. D section. Single phase 15 kVA and 25 kVA transformers must be mounted in a 20 in. W x 20 in. D section. All three phase distribution transformers must be located in 20 in. W x 20 in. D standard sections. Shielded Isolation Transformers are available. Other primary voltages may be supplied. NOTE: All transformers listed must be bottom mounted in a single shipping split, unless otherwise noted. Single Phase Distribution Transformers 120 V or 240 V Secondary Disconnect 480 V primary circuit breaker 240 V primary circuit breaker Distribution Transformer 600 V primary circuit breaker 480 V primary fusible switch 240 V primary fusible switch 600 V primary fusible switch ➀ 11/03 kVA Rating Disc. Amps Space (Inches) 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 0.5 1 1.5 5 10 15 25 15 15 15 15 30 40 60 15 15 15 30 50 70 125 15 15 15 15 20 30 50 15 15 15 15 25 35 60 15 15 15 25 45 70 125 15 15 15 10 20 30 50 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 36 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 39 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 36 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 36 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 48 12 12 12 21 ➀ 21 ➀ 36 36 Unit mounted transformers are available in 5 kVA and 10 kVA ratings. 30 in. space required. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 61 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Miscellaneous Units Three-Phase Distribution Transformers 208Y/120 V Secondary Disconnect 480 V primary circuit breaker 240 V primary circuit breaker 600 V primary circuit breaker 480 V primary fusible switch 240 V primary fusible switch 600 V primary fusible switch kVA Rating Disc. Amps Space (Inches) 9 15 30 45 9 15 30 45 9 15 30 45 9 15 30 45 9 15 30 45 9 15 30 45 15 20 40 60 30 40 90 125 15 20 40 50 15 20 40 60 25 40 80 125 10 20 35 50 30 30 36 36 30 30 36 39 30 30 36 36 30 30 36 36 30 30 36 48 30 30 36 36 Distribution Panelboards Panelboards are provided with space for QO/QOB or EH/EHB circuit breakers. All are provided with a main breaker, except where noted. Copper bus is standard. NOTE: NEHB panelboards cannot be used on 480 V Delta system. Ratings: 1-Phase NQOD = 120 / 240 V, 1∅ / 3W 3-Phase NQOD = 240 V Distribution Panelboard in an MCC 3-Phase NEHB = 480 Y / 277 V, 3∅ / 4W or 480 V Wye, 3∅ / 3W Unit Type 1-pole Spaces Main Amp/Frame Space (Inches) 20 100 / QO 27 42 225 / QD 51 24 100 / QO 27 30 100 / QO 30 42 225 / QD 51 30 100 / LUG ➀ 27 30 100 / FA 45 1-Phase Type NQOD 3-Phase Type NQOD 30 100 / IF 45 42 225 / KA 54 42 225 /IK 54 3-Phase Type NF ➀ No main breaker 62 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Miscellaneous Units Application and General Information . Factory Installed Panelboard Branch Circuit Breakers Panelboard Type Branch Circuit Breaker Type Poles Amps 10–60 1 70 10–60 QO/QOB 120/240 V 2 70–100 110–125 NQOD (QOB branch circuit breakers are standard, unless otherwise noted) 10–60 3 70–100 1 15–30 2 15–60 QO/QOB - GFI 120/240 V 15–60 QO/QOB 240 V 2 70–100 15–60 1 70 15–60 2 70–100 EDB (Bolt-on Only) 110–125 15–60 3 70–100 110–125 15–60 1 70 15–60 NF 2 70–100 EGB (Bolt-on Only) 110–125 15–60 3 70–100 110–125 15–60 1 70 15–60 EJB (Bolt-on Only) 2 70–100 15–60 3 70–100 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Miscellaneous Units Empty Mounting Units Empty mounting units are available in 3-inch increments from 6 in. through 48 in. high. Includes a removable, undrilled unit and a hinged door to provide space for customer mounted devices. Unit dimensions are 13.85 in. wide by 9.5 in.deep. Height is dependent on unit selected. Empty mounting units may be used in 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep standard sections. Empty Mounting Unit Full Section Empty Mounting Units (Relay Section) Consists of a removable undrilled mounting pan and a full height door on structure for customer mounted devices. The section does not contain vertical bus or a vertical wireway. The section cannot be modified to accept plug-on units. Horizontal bus is supplied to allow feed through to additional MCC sections. Panel height: 68 in. Panel depth (clearance from panel to door) 11.7 in. (15 in. deep section) 16.7 in. (20 in. deep section) Section Width (Inches) Panel Width (Inches) 20 18.13 25 23.13 30 28.13 35 33.13 Space (Inches) 72 Relay Section Blank Cover Plates Blank cover plates are available in 3-inch increments from 3 in. to 36 high. Required to fill unused space when rearranging plug-on units in an existing motor control center. Factory-assembled MCC orders are automatically provided with the proper number of blank cover plates to fill any unused space in each section. To provide space for future units (equipped space), add the desired number of inches before estimating the number of structures. Master Terminal Compartment For NEMA/EEMAC Class I or II, Type C Includes a removable 12 in. unit, hinged door, unwired 100 control and 15 power terminal blocks, and mounting provisions. Compartment may be located in the top or bottom in a 20 in. wide by 15 in. or 20 in. deep standard section. Master Terminal Compartment (Unit Shown Unwired) 64 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Miscellaneous Units Application and General Information Power Factor Correction Capacitors Power Factor Correction Capacitors listed are environmentally safe and include fuses for protection at the capacitor. These capacitors include discharge resistors as required by the NEC. When possible, capacitors are mounted directly below the corresponding starter and are connected between the starter contactor and overload relay. Installation of capacitors does not affect normal selection of overload thermal units, starters, or disconnects. Use the table below to size capacitors (in kvar) to the particular motor loads to be corrected. If motor characteristics are not available, the values in the last column provide approximate sizing. Do not use capacitors on controllers subject to plugging or jogging. It is recommended that only FullVoltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) starters be provided with power factor correction capacitors. Capacitors can be applied to other types of starters, but auxiliary contactors are often required. Some types of starters are not compatible with individual motor correction. Contact your local Schneider Electric field sales office for details or application assistance. Capacitor Sizing Table (KVAR) RPM – NEMA/EEMAC Design Horsepower 11/03 3600 1800 1200 900 720 600 Approx. Value When Motor Data Is Not Available B B C B C D B C B B 3 5 7.5 10 1.5 2 2.5 3 1.5 2 2.5 3 1 2 3 4 1.5 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 4 2.5 4 5 6.5 3 4 6 7.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 15 20 25 4 5 6 4 5 6 5 5 6 5 6.5 7.5 5 5 6 5 6 6 6.5 7.5 9 5 6 6 8 9 11 9 12 14 4 5 7 30 40 50 7 9 12 7 9 11 7.5 10 12 9 11 12.5 7.5 10 12 10 12 15 10 12 15 9 12 15 12 15 18 16 20 25 9 10 12 60 75 100 13.5 17 22 13.5 16 20 17.5 20 27.5 15 18 25 17.5 20 27.5 18 22.5 30 18 20 27.5 18 22.5 27.5 22 25 32.5 27 32.5 40 15 18 22.5 125 150 200 27.5 32.5 40 26 30 37.5 35 37.5 45 30 35 42.5 35 37.5 45 37.5 45 60 32.5 37.5 47.5 37.5 45 60 40 47.5 60 47.5 52.5 65 27.5 32.5 40 250 300 350 400 50 57.5 65 70 45 52.5 60 65 55 65 — — 52.5 60 67.5 75 55 65 — — 70 75 — — 55 65 75 80 70 90 — — 70 80 90 — 75 90 — — 50 55 65 70 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 65 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Altivar® AC Drive Units in MCCs General Information AC Drives have become common devices to vary the speed of AC motors. Motor control center packaging of AC Drives has become common as more and more applications require accurate control in an integrated solution. Schneider Electric provides a flexible AC Drive in the industry’s most flexible MCC drive units. Typical applications include pumps, fans, conveyors, mixers and other industrial process machinery. Varying the speed of these applications can provide benefits in energy savings, material flow rates, output quality, and process flexibility. The Schneider Electric MCC AC Drive units integrate a single family of Altivar 58 AC Drives into a combination drive package for MCCs. MCC enclosed Altivar 58 AC Drive units are designed for use with standard three-phase asynchronous motors with a power range of 1/2 to 500 hp (variable torque) or 1/2 to 400 hp (constant torque). MCC AC Drive units can be applied to 480 V, three (3) phase, 3-wire or 4-wire systems. The MCC AC Drive units have been designed to provide optimal protection in NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1 Gasketed (1A), and 12 motor control center enclosures, and in specific NEMA/EEMAC 3R applications. Application One of the flexible features of the Altivar 58 AC Drive is its ability to be adapted to multiple load types or control strategies. An important factor to consider when choosing an AC Drive is the torque profile of the load the AC motor will be connected to. Machine loads can be divided into the following profiles based on torque requirements: variable torque, constant torque, constant horsepower, and impact loads. The majority of MCC AC Drives are used in variable torque loads. The load explanations below should help in choosing and sizing the correct AC Drives. Square D MCC Altivar 58 AC Drive units are offered in 3 load torque types: Variable Torque, Constant Torque and Low Noise Variable Torque. One of these three load torque types is set at the factory to allow faster commissioning and presets menu options for the typical application needs. The low noise variable torque type AC Drive minimizes motor noise for variable torque applications such as fans. Variable Torque Loads Many types of loads require reduced torque when driven at speeds less than the base speed of the load. Conversely, such loads may require increased torque when driven at speeds greater than the base speed of the load (see below). In both cases, these loads are classified as variable torque loads. Many variable torque loads decrease with the square of the speed. This relationship is characteristic of centrifugal pumps and of certain types of fans and blowers. Typically, as the speed decreases, the torque decreases with the square of the speed and the horsepower decreases with the cube of the speed. 100% Load at 100% Speed At 50% Speed: • Torque = 25% of full load torque • HP = 12.5% of full speed brake horsepower (BHP) Variable Torque Loads 66 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information Constant Torque Loads With constant torque loads, the torque loading is not a function of speed. Typical applications are: • • • • Traction drives Conveyors Positive displacement pumps Hoists As the speed changes, the load torque remains constant and the horsepower changes linearly with speed (see below). Constant 100% Torque At 50% Speed: • Torque = 100% of full load torque • HP = 50% of full speed BHP Constant Horsepower Loads With a constant horsepower load, the motor torque required above the motor base speed decreases inversely, while the horsepower remains fairly constant (see below). Grinders and winders are constant horsepower loads. Above Motor Base Speed: • Torque decreases inversely • HP remains fairly constant 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 67 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Impact Loads With an impact load, the torque loading is intermittent and is not a function of speed (below). Impact loads are exhibited by a punch press, which uses a large flywheel to deliver the energy needed for the load. It is also characteristic of loads that are driven through a clutch, which is cycled during the process operation. Press applications require that the motor and AFC combination produce sufficient accelerating torque to return the flywheel to the required speed before the beginning of the next work stroke. For clutch and other impacting applications, the peak torque requirements must be considered. Consult a Square D field sales office when impact loads are being controlled. Selection 1. Select all drives based on motor full load amperes. Horsepower is provided for convenience only. 2. Select the drive based on application (torque) type, i.e., variable torque, constant torque or variable torque, low noise. The drive will be factory programmed for the selected application type. If you need assistance in qualifying a special drive application or reviewing specifications and drawings, contact your local Square D field sales office. 3. The Altivar® MCC AC Drive includes a basic power circuit consisting of an input disconnect, current limiting fuses and drive controller. Select any optional contactors required for the application by referring to “Power Contactor Options.” 4. Select any control circuit devices by referring to “Pilot Devices.” 5. Select any miscellaneous features such as line reactors or extra control VA by referring to “Miscellaneous Options.” 68 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drives The Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive in MCCs offers an economical, general purpose drive in a high density, space saving package. Units are available in NEMA 1, NEMA 1 with gaskets, and NEMA 12 (for drives less than 125 hp) MCC enclosures in the following ranges: Variable Torque Applications Motor Ratings Constant Torque Applications Variable Torque, Low Noise Applications 460 Vac, 3 Phase, 60 Hz 0.5 to 500 hp (up to 590 A) 0.5 to 400 hp (up to 477 A) 0.5 to 75 hp (up to 96 A) 230 Vac, 3 Phase, 60 Hz 1 to 50 hp (up to 143 A) 1 to 40 hp (up to 116 A) 1 to 40 hp (up to 116 A) 200 Vac, 3 Phase, 60 Hz 1 to 50 hp (up to 143 A) 1 to 40 hp (up to 116 A) 1 to 40 hp (up to 116 A) Contact a Schneider Electric field sales office for NEMA 3R applications. MCC Package Features As standard, basic MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive units include: • Altivar 58 TRX AC drive. • Operator keypad display mounted on the front of the unit. • Disconnect (circuit breaker or fusible switch). • Class J power fuses (for drives less than 125 hp). • Cooling fans. • UL 845 Listed for 100,000 amperes short circuit current rating (SCCR) at 480 Vac. • Control station plate with space for five 22 mm operators. • Three-phase line reactor for drives above 25 hp variable torque (VT) @ 480 V, or above 20 hp constant torque (CT) or variable torque low noise (VTLN) @ 480 V, or above 10 hp @ 208/240 V. Most MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive units are plug-on style saddles which can be factory/field-installed in Model 6 MCCs or field-installed in Model 5 MCCs. There are no placement limitations for mounting any Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive in Square D MCC sections. Drive units are designed with standard features of Model 6 MCC units, such as: • White interiors for greater visibility during maintenance. • Cast metal disconnect handle for ruggedness. • Twin-handle cam racking mechanism in plug-on units to expedite installation/removal. • Vertical and horizontal wireways are left undisturbed by the drive unit. Integral to each MCC AC Drive unit is a thermal management system designed to maintain the drive and other electrical devices at recommended temperatures. The thermal management system included in NEMA/EEMAC 1 or 1A (Gasketed) MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive units consists of fans and louvered doors which force outside air across the Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive component for cooling purposes (see the figure on the next page). The thermal management system included in NEMA/EEMAC 12 MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive units consists of a closed duct system to separate outside air from electrical components. Inlet and outlet ducts allow airflow across the metal heatsink fins of the Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive component as shown in the figure on the next page. This totally enclosed duct cooled (TEDC) concept achieves the oiltight/dusttight rating required for NEMA/EEMAC 12 and removes heat without contaminating the drive electronics or other MCC units with outside air. The thermal management systems are self-powered and include protection to shut down the drive in case of fan or duct blockage. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 69 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information All MCC Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drive units include a digital operator keypad display mounted on the front of the unit. Operator adjustments can be made and diagnostics can be viewed without opening the energized enclosure. The control station plate has pre-punched spaces for five 22-mm XB5 type pilot devices (factory or field installed). Several factory installed pilot devices are listed on page 75. Drive Electronics Drive Drive Enclosed Cooling Duct Cool Air Airflow of NEMA/EEMAC 1/1A MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive Unit AC Drive Units Cool Air Airflow of NEMA/EEMAC 12 MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive Unit Circuit breakers used on the MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive basic units are Square D brand Mag-Gard® (magnetic only) type. Fusible switches used on the MCC Altivar 58 TRX AC Drive units are bladed switches (molded case switches above 100 A) with Class J fuse clips installed between the drive and the switch. Units below 125 hp include the Class J fuses factory installed. Factory Options • Bypass contactors are available as either integrated in the drive or barriered from the drive unit. • Input contactor. • Output contactor. • Extra capacity 120 Vac control power supply for customer use. • Line reactors. • Pilot devices. • Unit extensions to provide additional panel space. • Wired and unwired control relays. • Multi-drive cabinets. Monitoring and Indication • The front-mounted operator keypad displays setup parameters and the last fault occurrence with four-digit display and plain, multi-language dialog on one line of 16 characters. • Drive parameters are factory preset for the most common adjustments and the control schemes ordered with the unit. • Security to prevent accidental adjustments is provided by an accesslocking switch on the back of the keypad display. Up to four different programs can be saved in the keypad and retrieved for sharing between multiple drive units. Real time display of: • Drive state (running, ready, accelerating, decelerating, etc.). • Reference frequency (in Hertz). • Output frequency (in Hertz). • Motor speed (in revolutions/minute). • Motor current (in amperes). • Mains voltage (in volts). • Motor thermal state (as a percentage). • Drive thermal state (as a percentage). • Last fault. 70 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information • Keypad frequency reference (in Hz). • Output power (as a percentage of drive rated power). • Energy consumed (in kilowatts). • Run time (in hours). One normally-open contact indication of drive running (closes on run). One normally-closed contact indication of drive fault (opens on fault). Optional analog output for motor current, motor frequency, ramp output, motor power, and motor torque. AC Drive Options • Commissioning software for personal computers and personal digital assistants (PDAs). • 24 Vdc analog I/O extension card (tachometer feedback). • 24 Vdc digital I/O extension card (encoder feedback). • Modbus® plus communication card. • Unitelway/Modbus communication card. • Profibus DP communication card. • Ethernet communication card for Transparent Ready™ integration. • DeviceNet communication card. Drive Power Circuit • Consists of disconnect device and drive pre-programmed for selected options if applicable. CB or Disc • Includes current-limiting power fuses, if necessary. Power fuses are UL Class J. • Unit is UL 845 Listed for 100,000 amperes Short Circuit Current. Power Fuse • Includes operation keypad/display mounted on front of the unit. Drive • Control power transformer (480 V/120 V), if necessary, for enclosure ventilation fans is included. • Pilot devices are optional and are only available as 22 mm XB5 or XB4 type pilot devices (five devices maximum). M “Basic” Drive Power Circuit 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 71 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Space Requirements NOTE: In the following tables the horsepower shown is nominal and only for convenience; size the controller by the actual motor full-load amperage. Variable Torque 480 Vac Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drives NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Motor Rated Horsepower at 460 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) Space (Height) Space (Height) 0.5 to 3 hp 5.8 12” 24” 5 to 7.5 hp 13 15” 24” 10 to 15 hp 24 24” 36” 20 to 25 hp 34 27” 36” 30 to 50 hp 65 45” 45” 60 to 100 hp 124 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) 125 hp 156 72” (25” wide) Not available 150 to 250 hp 302 72” (30” wide) Not available 300 to 500 hp 590 72” (35” wide) Not available NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Variable Torque 208/240 Vac Altivar 58 TRX AC Drives Motor Rated Horsepower 200 / 230 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) Space (Height) Space (Height) 1 to 3 hp 11 12” 24” 5 hp 18 15” 24” 7.5 to 10 hp 31 24” 36” 15 to 25 hp 75 45” 45” 30 to 50 hp 143 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Constant Torque 480 Vac Altivar 58 TRX AC Drives Motor Rated Horsepower at 460 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) Space (Height) Space (Height) 0.5 to 3 hp 5.8 12” 24” 5 to 7.5 hp 13 15” 24” 10 to 15 hp 24 24” 36” 20 hp 33 27” 36” 25 to 50 hp 66 45” 45” 50 to 75 hp 115 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) 100 hp 124 72” (25” wide) Not available 125 to 200 hp 240 72” (30” wide) Not available 300 to 400 hp 477 72” (35” wide) Not available 72 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information Constant Torque 208/240 Vac Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drives NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Motor Rated Horsepower 200 / 230 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) Space (Height) Space (Height) 1 to 3 hp 11 12” 24” 5 hp 18 15” 24” 7.5 to 10 hp 31 24” 36” 15 to 20 hp 60 45” 45” 25 to 40 hp 116 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) Variable Torque, Low Noise 480 Vac Altivar 58 TRX AC Drives NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Space (Height) Space (Height) Motor Rated Horsepower 460 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) 0.5 to 3 hp 5.8 12” 24” 5 to 7.5 hp 13 15” 24” 10 to 15 hp 24 24” 36” 20 hp 33 27” 36” 25 to 40 hp 52 45” 45” 50 to 75 hp 96 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) Variable Torque, Low Noise 208/240 Vac Altivar 58 TRX AC Drives 11/03 NEMA 1 and 1A (Gasketed) NEMA 12 Space (Height) Motor Rated Horsepower 200 / 230 Vac Maximum Continuous Output Current (A) Space (Height) 1 to 3 hp 11 12” 24” 5 hp 18 15” 24” 7.5 to 10 hp 31 24” 36” 15 to 20 hp 60 45” 45” 25 to 40 hp 116 72” (20” wide) 72” (20” wide) © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 73 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Power Contactor Options Only one option is allowed. CB CB Power Fuse Power Circuit Diagram or Disc Disc or CB CB or Disc CB Power Fuse Power Fuse Drive or Disc Power Fuse Drive Drive Drive Separate Bypass Unit M M M M Nominal Motor Horsepower (hp) and Type of Torque▲ Integrated Bypass Only available with Barriered Bypass Circuit Breaker uses NEMA Disconnect; uses contactors TeSys contactors. Barriered Application Rated Compac 6 Bypass (14 A max.) Load Contactor Line Contactor 208 Vac 240 Vac 480 Vac Additional Space Additional Space Additional Space Additional Space Additional Space 1-5 All 0.5-10 All 12 in. 18 in. 6 in. 12 in. 12 in. 15-20 All and 25 hp VT 12 in. 18 in. Not available 12 in. 12 in. 15-25 VT 15-20 CT 15-20 VTLN 30-50 VT 25-40 CT 25-40 VTLN 9 in. 27 in. Not available 9 in. 9 in. 30-50 VT 25-40 CT 25-40 VTLN 60-100 VT 50-75 CT 50-75 VTLN 5 in. added to width 33 in. in adjacent section for circuit breaker; 39 in. in adjacent section for FS Not available 5 in. added to width 5 in. added to width 5 in. added to width 25 in. added to width Not available 5 in. added to width 5 in. added to width 20 in. added to width 25 in. added to width Not available Consult factory. Consult factory. • Basic Drive features with isolation and bypass contactors for emergency full speed operation in same compartment. • TeSys D- or F-Line contactors are used. • Only available as Circuit Breaker disconnect common to drive and bypass. • Drive and bypass are UL 845 Listed for 100,000 A Short Circuit Current and coordinated for Type 1 protection. • Includes AFC-OffBypass selector switch, Red Push-To-Test “AFC” Pilot Light and Yellow Push-To-Test “Bypass” Pilot Light on bypass control island. NOTE: Bypass is not isolated from the drive compartment. Both drive and bypass must be removed at the same time. • Basic Drive features with isolation and bypass contactors for emergency full speed operation. • Barriered Application Rated Compac 6 Bypass uses TeSys contactors. NEMA contactors are used on barriered NEMA bypass. • Separate disconnect for drive and bypass can be operated independently. • Drive and bypass starter are enclosed in separate barriered compartments. • Drive and bypass are UL 845 Listed for 100,000 A Short Circuit Current and coordinated for Type 1 protection. • Includes AFC-Off-Bypass selector switch, Red Push-To-Test “AFC” Pilot Light and Yellow PushTo-Test “Bypass” Pilot Light on bypass control island. (Non-Push-To-Test used on Compac 6) • Basic Drive features with load contactor for motor isolation. Contactor is open when drive is not running. • TeSys D- or F-Line contactors are used. • Drive and load contactor are UL 845 Listed for 100,000 A Short Circuit Current. • Basic Drive features with line contactor for isolating drive from input line. • TeSys D- or F-Line contactors are used. • Drive and line contactor are UL 845 Listed for 100,000 A Short Circuit Current. 5-10 All 50 VT 125-200 VT 100-200 CT ▲ Abbreviations for type of torque are as follows: VT = Variable Torque; CT = Constant Torque; VTLN = Variable Torque, Low Noise. 74 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information Pilot Devices Number of Spaces Used (5 maximum available) Pilot Devices Choose only one pilot device form number below for each drive.) Hand-Off-Auto Selector with Manual Speed Potentiometer 2 Start and Stop Push Buttons with Manual Speed Potentiometer 3 Forward-Off-Reverse Selector with Manual Speed Potentiometer 2 Pilot Lights (Available as LED type, direct supply only.) Red “Power On” Light 1 Yellow Push-To-Test “Fault” Light 1 Red Push-To-Test “Run” Light 1 Green Push-To-Test “Run” Light 1 Red Push-To-Test “Stopped” Light 1 Green Push-To-Test “Stopped” Light 1 Yellow Push-To-Test “Hand” and “Auto” Lights 1 Miscellaneous Options Space Adder Option Line Reactors Each line reactor is mounted in the MCC cabinet as a separate unit above the drive unit and is factory wired to the line side of the drive. Not available on NEMA 12 MCCs. 9 in. 3% Impedance: 5 to 10 hp, 208/240 Vac 7.5 to 20 hp, 480 Vac 25 hp VT, 480 Vac 12 in. 1% Impedance: 15 to 50 hp, 208/240 Vac 25 CT/VTLN to 500 hp, 480 Vac Included in drive as standard; no space adder 1 to 3 hp, 208/240 Vac 1 to 3 hp, 480 Vac with Basic Power Option 12 in. All others 0 in. Analog I/O Extension Card (VW3A58201U) Note: The bypass and output contactor power options require factory use of 1 logic output on the Analog I/O Extension Card. 0 in. Digital I/O Extension Card (VW3A58202U) 0 in. 0 in. Option Cards Modbus® Plus Communication Card (VW3A58302U) Choose only one. Modbus/Unitelway Communication Card (VW3A58303U) 0 in. Profibus DP Communication Card (VW3A58307U) 0 in. Johnson Controls N2 Communication Card (VW3A58354U) 0 in. Landis & Staefa P1 Communication Module (1000-6A58-KP1) 0 in. 100 VA Customer Capacity on Drive’s 120 V Control Transformer Each option board is pre-installed onto drive inside unit with all customer terminations left unwired (Type 1A wiring). Dynamic Braking Resistors The use of braking resistors dissipates excess energy generated by the motor whenever the motor functions in the generator mode as on high-inertia loads or machines driving a load. Resistors are mounted in the MCC cabinet as a separate unit above the drive unit and are factory wired to the DC bus of the drive. Not available in NEMA 12 MCCs. 11/03 3% Impedance: 1 to 3 hp, 208/240 Vac 1 to 5 hp, 480 Vac Ethernet Communication Card (VW3A58310U) 0 in. DeviceNet Communication Card (VW3A58309U) 0 in. 1 to 2 hp, 208/240 Vac 1 to 10 hp, 480 Vac 6 in. 3 to 10 hp, 208/240 Vac 15 to 20 hp, 480 Vac 9 in. 15 to 20 hp, 208/240 Vac 25 to 40 hp, 480 Vac 9 in. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 75 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Space Adder Option 1 to 10 hp, 208/240 Vac 1 to 20 hp, 480 Vac 3 in., 6 in., 12 in. 15 to 50 hp Variable Torque, 208/240 Vac 15 to 40 hp Constant Torque, 208/240 Vac 15 to 40 hp Variable Torque, Low Noise, 208/240 Vac 25 to 50 hp Variable Torque, 480 Vac 25 to 40 hp Constant Torque, 208/240 Vac 25 to 40 hp Variable Torque, Low Noise, 208/240 Vac 3 in., 6 in., 9 in. Basic Unit Extenders Provides the amount of additional space shown in the Space Adder column below the drive unit for customer-added devices with a single door to cover the drive and added space. Only available for Basic Power Option. Auto Start Relay without Delay Provides interposing relay for starting the drive in auto mode via customer-supplied 120 Vac. Requires Hand-Off-Auto selector switch. Auto Start Relay with Delay Provides interposing relay for starting the drive in auto mode after a delay (adjustable from 1.5 to 30 seconds) via customer-supplied 120 Vac. Requires Hand-Off-Auto selector switch. Unwired Relay Provides unwired D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. contacts, 120 Vac coil, Type 1A wiring. Unwired On Delay Timer Provides unwired D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. untimed contacts and 1 N.O./1 N.C. 10 to 180 second on-delay contacts, 120 Vac coil, Type 1A wiring. Control and Timing Relays Unwired Off Delay Timer Provides unwired D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. untimed contacts and 1 N.O./1 N.C. 10 to 180 second off-delay contacts, 120 Vac coil, Type 1A wring. 3 in. for 1 to 20 hp, 480 Vac and 1 to 10 hp, 208/ 240 Vac models. 0 in. for all other models. Wired Relay Provides D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. contacts wired per customer provided diagrams. Wired On Delay Timer Provides D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. untimed contacts and 1 N.O./1 N.C. 10 to 180 second ondelay contacts wired per customer provided diagrams. Wired Off Delay Timer Provides D-line relay with 2 N.O./2 N.C. untimed contacts and 1 N.O./1 N.C.10 to 180 second offdelay contacts wired per customer provided diagrams. 76 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers AC Drive Units Application and General Information Wiring Diagrams Typical Wiring Diagram for MCC Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drive with Basic Power Option BKR FU Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 1 2 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 3 4 5 1 3 AFC S/L2 4 5 6 U/T1 R/L1 2 V/T2 W/T3 T/L3 6 GN2 T1 T1 T2 T2 MOTOR T3 T3 GND GND J40 Y.46.ED.ATVPRIFU.01 1 3 2 4 480 V H2 ED-ATVXFMR-04.SYM H1 X1 120 V X2 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 1 SS HAND OFF AUTO XOO K J 23 24 REMOVE JUMPER IF USED OOX 14 13 XOO D C 54 53 AUTO START OOX 44 43 USER SUPPLIED SHUTDOWN FU Y.46.ED.ATVSECFU.01 ED-ATVGRD-01.SYM 1 GND GND S AO1 COM AI1 +10 AI2 GND 1 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 +24 RUN FWD AUTO/MAN FORCED LOCAL MSP A B C (S3) FU 2 SPEED POT (S2) X1 X2 21 13 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-V58FTB-08.SYM 1C MMIR FAN ED-V58RFAN-02.SYM 1 F 2 UNIT VENTILATION FAN 22 X1 Y X2 14 MMIR L C M 1B 1A AFC FAULT SIGNAL (SHOWN IN FAULT MODE) AFC RUN SIGNAL (SHOWN NOT RUNNING) R1A R1B R1C R2A R2C HAND 15 ED-V58FTB-07.SYM 16 21 13 17 L 1C MMIR 1B 1A MMIR +V 18 2A AUTO SPEED REFERENCE 4-20 mA DC SIGNAL (INPUT Z=100 Ω) VW3A58302U AUTO CUSTOMER CONTACT (NO) (S1) 22 X1 Y X2 14 MODBUS+ CARD Address: User defined Set by DIP switches on Module MMIR C M RUN 21 13 22 X1 R X2 14 CUSTOMER RUN (NO) TERMINAL BLOCK DESIGNATIONS NUMERIC INDICATES 120 VAC ALPHA INDICATES 24 VDC ALPHA NUMERIC INDICATES ANALOG 11/03 (NO) DRIVE UNIT USER CONNECTIONS SHUTDOWN INTERLOCK (REMOVE JUMPER USER IF USED) SUPPLIED AUTO RUN (NO) START 15 16 17 18 C D J K AUTO SPEED REFERENCE 4-20 mA DC Signal S1 S2 S3 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 77 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information AC Drive Units Typical Wiring Diagram for MCC Altivar® 58 TRX AC Drive with Barriered Bypass Power Option CB 1 2 BYPASS CONTACTOR L1 3 4 5 6 BKR T1 L1 T1 L2 T2 L2 T2 L3 T3 L3 T3 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 R/L1 U/T1 AFC S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 SS HAND OFF AUTO XOO 24 23 HF AST 480V C C 1 3 D W/T3 GN2 XF GND GND 1 1 3 L1 T1 L2 T2 L3 53 X2 FAN F 2 F2J F2 F1J 1 UNIT VENTILATION FAN 1A 1B 20 MMIR L MMIR +V 17 C 21 22 X1 13 14 Y X2 24V 1C MMIR MMIR 1B 1A L 18 MMIR CUSTOMER RUN (NO) +V SPEED POT (S3) (S2) (S1) AUTO SPEED REFERENCE 4-20mA DC SIGNAL (INPUT Z=100 Ω) M FAULT 2A MSP A B C AFC FAULT SIGNAL (SHOWN IN FAULT MODE) AFC RUN SIGNAL (SHOWN NOT RUNNING) R1A R1B R1C R2A R2C MMIR CUSTOMER FAULT (NC) T3 ISOLATION CONTACTOR 44 43 1C F1 AUTO/MAN FAULT RESET 19 X1 S AO1 COM AI1 +10 AI2 RUN FWD LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 +24 OOX 14 XOO 54 OOX D 13 TRANS 120V X2 1 GND MOTOR IC FU 1 J27 J28 J30 H1 OL BC C VW3A58201U LI5 OPTION BOARD LI6 CM2 +24 24V LO OUTPUT CONTACTOR COMMAND LO+ 10V M COM A3A A3B +10 -10 AO CM2 FU 2 480V 4 H3 H2 H1 H4 10V TRANS X1 120V X2 1 RUN 2A 21 22 X1 13 14 R X2 A B A B FU 2 ISOLATION CONTACTOR INTERPOSING RELAY ICIR A1 C A2 AFC RUN IC 5 SS AFC OFF BYP XOO 24 23 ICIR 13 14 6 12 1 2 REMOVE JUMPER IF USED 13 1A BC 3 AUTO START 7 SHUTDOWN INTERLOCK (REMOVE JUMPER IF USED) USER SUPPLIED AUTO START TERMINAL BLOCK DESIGNATIONS NUMERIC INDICATES 120 VAC BYPASS UNIT ALPHA INDICATES 24 VDC USER ALPHA NUMERIC INDICATES ANALOG CONNECTIONS 1 2 6 7 B C D 1 GND OL OL X2 DRIVE UNIT USER CONNECTIONS ISOLATION CONTACTOR BYPASS CONTACTOR BYP RUN 2 21 13 Y 22 X1 X2 14 AST 0.3-30 SEC C 2 7 SPARE 120 VAC RUN CONNECT (NO) A X2 BC 3A C C2 2A TS 6L TS 7L 22 6 R IC 3A C C2 2A TS 6L TS 7L 1A SS HAND AUTO USER SUPPLIED SHUTDOWN INTERLOCK 22 X1 14 13 IC 12 8 21 21 13 BC 14 AST OOX 13 4 AUTO START TIMER AUTO SPEED REFERENCE 4-20 mA DC Signal FAULT (NC) X1 X2 17 18 19 20 A B C D S1 S2 S3 78 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information Altistart® 48 Soft Start Units General Information Motor Control Center Soft Start units provide a pre-engineered, integrated motor control center package consisting of a combination disconnect and soft start controller for reduced voltage starting and soft stopping of standard three-phase asynchronous induction (squirrel cage) motors. The Model 6 MCC Soft Start units integrate the latest technology Altistart 48 Soft Start into a combination starter package for MCCs. The Altistart 48 (ATS 48) is a digital controller that provides the benefits of reduced current inrush (and resulting voltage drop) and reduced mechanical shocks that can result from starting a motor across the line. A six thyristor (SCR) solid state power configuration is used to provide smooth acceleration and deceleration control of a three-phase squirrel cage motor. The Altistart 48 uses a patented technology to control the motor performance based on the motor torque rather than simple voltage- or current-based control (see figures below). Advanced control algorithms are incorporated to ensure smooth rotation throughout the starting ramp without mechanical instability at the end of starting. The torque control provides accurate and repeatable acceleration and deceleration. This feature allows for linear speed ramp without tachometer feedback and reduces the temperature rise of the motor. Speed Current Torque Ramp Current Limit Current Limit Torque Ramp Time Time Torque Ramp vs. Current Limit Starting Benefits of Altistart 48 Soft Starts • Reduced torque during start, which: — Prevents damage to material in process — Can increase the life of machines and reduce down time • Reduced current peaks on the supply during starting, which: — Reduces plant capacity requirements — Reduces voltage sag on installations with limited capacity — Eliminates side effects on other equipment driven from a weak supply • Smooth acceleration and deceleration independent of fluctuations in motor load: — Ideally suited for most fans, centrifugal pumps or other variable torque loads — Can eliminate water hammer even on difficult pumping applications • Advanced protection for the motor and the installation, including: — Selectable overload protection class — Overload pre-alarm — Phase loss and reversal protection — Stall protection during start — Protection from material jams while running — Underload detection 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 79 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Soft Start Units MCC Packaging Altistart® 48 Motor Control Center Soft Start units are available from 11 to 604 Amps in NEMA 1, 1A (Gasketed), 12, and 3R MCC enclosures. Units are available for three (3) phase, 60Hz, 208V, 240V , 480V, or 600V, 3 wire or 4 wire power systems. The Altistart 48 Soft Start in MCCs can provide soft starting (reduced voltage) and deceleration along with machine and motor protection of standard NEMA B-Design three-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors in the following power ranges: 3–200hp, 208V; 5–250hp, 230V; 10–500HP, 460V; and 15–600HP, 575V. The MCC Soft Start units integrate the latest technology Altistart 48 Soft Start from Schneider Electric into a combination starter package for MCCs. All packages and options are UL 845 listed for a minimum 65,000 Amp short circuit rating up to 480V (ratings of 100,000 Amps @ 600V are available with fuses). All MCC Soft Start units include a door-mounted keypad for setup and monitoring of the Altistart controller. Control devices, if chosen, are mounted on the unit control station plate. The circuit breaker disconnects used on MCC Soft Start units are Square D brand thermal-magnetic type. The fusible switch disconnects used on MCC Soft Start units are automatic molded case switches with visible blades. Provisions for Class J or L fuses are provided. Fuses are not installed at the factory. Each unit is a Motor Control Center style package able to be installed and connected to standard MCC sections. Units are saddle type, plug-on construction up to 125HP @ 480V (156 amperes) and full height relay sections above 156 amperes. A 20-inch-deep MCC is required for units rated above 156 amperes. The NEMA 1, 1A, and 12 units are all totally enclosed, dead front, non-ventilated. NEMA 3R units are enclosed in a force ventilated, climate controlled outdoor rated cabinet for 14–104ºF. Features Included: • Current limiting short circuit protection provisions to provide high short circuit rating for the unit (65 kA at 600 V). • Input power disconnect. Fusible switch or circuit breaker disconnects are available. • TeSys D- and F-Line contactors are standard (NEMA/EEMAC type contactors are optional). • Door-mounted keypad for setup and monitoring of the Altistart controller. • Control devices, if chosen, are mounted on the unit control station plate. • Agency Listing: The Motor Control Center Altistart 48 Soft Start units are listed via the motor control center UL 845 procedures. The CSA and NOM labels can also be applied. 80 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information • Bypass Contactor: A bypass contactor is supplied on all units. This allows the motor current to bypass the Soft Start thyristors once the Soft Start has ramped up to full voltage/full speed. The use of a shorting contactor reduces temperature rise within the enclosure during steady state operation and requires less current carrying duty on the thyristors. • Torque Control System (TCS™): The Altistart® 48 uses TCS ramping to accelerate the motor to full voltage. Basing the acceleration ramp on the motor torque rather than current or voltage, as used in traditional soft starts, provides a linear speed ramp independent of the motor loading without tachometer feedback. The TCS ramp is also used for improved control of deceleration and eliminates the need for a special controller to handle water hammer problems. • Integrated motor and controller thermal protection: The motor and controller temperature are continuously calculated based on the controller nominal current and the current that is actually drawn. The cooling curve of the motor is simulated through an electronic circuit that stores the thermal state of the motor even if supply power is disconnected. A rise in motor temperature can be caused by a slight or severe overload of long or short duration. As shown in the figure below, the Altistart 48 controller creates a digital model of the motor temperature based on two thermal images. The first (T1) represents the level of temperature rise corresponding to “iron” (motor frame). The second (T2) represents the temperature rise of “copper” (stator windings). For each thermal image, two levels of alarm are detected. An overload pre-alarm is signaled via logic output when the thermal state exceed 105% for T1 and/or 130% for T2. A thermal fault is signaled via output relay and keypad when the temperature rise exceeds 110% for T1 and 140% for T2. t 60 mn 5 mn T1 5s T2 Pre-alarm 1.05 1 1.11 2 I/In 3 4 5 Altistart 48 Electronic Overload Thermal Trip Curves 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 81 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Soft Start Units Starting and Stopping Four types of starting are available: • • • • TCS soft start—adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds TCS with “boost”—adjustable 50 to 100% of mains voltage Current limit—adjustable from 150 to 500% of controller rating Voltage ramping Three types of stopping are available: • Freewheel or coast to stop • TCS soft stop—adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds • InTele Braking—adjustable from 50 to 100% Protective Features • • • • • • • • Motor thermal overload protection—choice of Class 2, 10, 10A, 15, 20, 25, or 30 Soft Start thermal protection Motor phase loss protection Line supply failure Overcurrent fault Locked rotor fault Line frequency outside limits of +/- 5% or +/- 20% Selectable protection, including: — Phase reversal — Stall and jam — Thermal overload pre-alarm — Current threshold alarm — Underload fault Monitoring and Indication Door Mounted Keypad • Displays setup parameters and fault codes for previous five faults. • Factory preset for most common adjustments. • Security to avoid accidental controller modifications is provided by dip switches on the back of the keypad, which must be adjusted to provide access to 3 programming levels. Real-time indication via the digital keypad of: • • • • • Motor current Load Torque Motor thermal state Power factor Fault status Three logic outputs: • Motor thermal overload or indication of motor current present • Current threshold alarm • Motor underload alarm One analog output for 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA indication of motor current torque, thermal state, active power, or power factor. Two logic inputs, which are configurable for force to freewheel, thermal overload reset, or indication of external fault. 82 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information Options • • • • • • • • • • Input Isolation Contactor Full Voltage Bypass Starter NEMA/EEMAC HP rated contactors substituted for TeSys D- or F-Line contactors Reversing 120 Vac Control Power Transformer 120 Vac customer VA capacity added to control power transformer Push To Test Pilot Lights LED Pilot Lights Auxiliary interlocks Communication network (Modbus®, Modbus Plus, DeviceNet, Profibus, or Ethernet) Application The ATS48 controller must be selected on the basis of three main criteria: • Main voltage supply: — Three-phase AC voltage: 208, 240, 480, or 600 V • The power and the nominal current (motor FLA) indicated on the motor nameplate • The type of application and the operating cycle. To simplify selection, two types of applications are defined: — Standard duty — Severe duty Standard or severe duty applications define the limiting values of the current and the duty cycle ratings. Standard Duty Application In standard duty applications, the ATS48 controller is designed to provide: • Starting at 400% nominal motor current (In) for 23 seconds or at 300% nominal motor current (In) for 46 seconds from a cold state • Starting at 300% nominal motor current (In) for 23 seconds or at 400% nominal motor current (In) for 12 seconds with a load factor of 50% and 10 starts per hour or an equivalent thermal cycling The motor thermal protection conforms to Class 10 overload protection Example: Centrifugal pump. See other examples in the Application Areas table on the next page. Severe Duty Application In severe duty applications, the ATS48 controller is designed to provide: • Starting at 400% nominal motor current (In) for 48 seconds or at 300% nominal motor current (In) for 90 seconds from a cold state • Starting at 400% nominal motor current (In) for 25 seconds with a load factor of 50% and 5 starts per hour or an equivalent thermal cycling The motor thermal protection conforms to Class 20 overload protection. Example: Grinder. See other examples in the Application Areas table on the next page. Selecting the Starter Once the appropriate application has been selected from the Application Areas table, select the starter from the tables starting on page 85 according to the supply voltage and the motor horsepower. If severe application is required, choose the next higher horsepower unit. For convenience, the Altistart® selection tables are based on nominal horsepower ratings. Be aware that nameplate Full Load Amps and starting characteristics vary depending on motor manufacturer, base speed, and design. Altistart units must be quoted based on maximum unit amps, not horsepower. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 83 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Soft Start Units See the Altistart® 48 catalog 8636CT0201 and technical publication 8636PD9703 for additional information. Depending on the type of machine, the applications are categorized as standard or severe duty based on the starting characteristics which are given, by example, in the table below. Application Areas Type of Machine Application Functions Performed by the ATS48 Controller Starting Current (% In) Starting Times Centrifugal pump Standard Deceleration (reduction in pressure surges); Protection against underloads or inversion of the phase rotation direction 300 5 to 15 Piston pump Standard Control of running dry and direction of rotation of the pump 350 5 to 10 Fan Standard Severe if > 30 s Detection of overloads caused by clogging or underloads (motor fan transmission broken); Braking torque on stopping 300 10 to 40 Cold compressor Standard Protection, even for special motors 300 5 to 10 Screw compressor Standard Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation; Contact for automatic draining on stopping 300 3 to 20 Centrifugal compressor Standard Severe if > 30 s Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation; Contact for automatic emptying on stopping 350 10 to 40 Piston compressor Standard Protection against inversion of direction of phase rotation; Contact for automatic emptying on stopping 350 5 to 10 Conveyor, transporter Standard Overload control for detecting faults or underload control for detecting breaks 300 3 to 10 Lifting screw Standard Overload control for detecting hard spots or underload control for detecting breaks 300 3 to 10 Drag lift Standard Overload control for detecting jamming or underload control for detecting breaks 400 2 to 10 Lift Standard Overload control for detecting jamming or underload control for detecting breaks; Constant starting with variable load 350 5 to 10 Circular saw, band saw Standard Severe if > 30 s Braking for fast stop 300 10 to 60 Pulper, butchery knife Severe Torque control on starting 400 3 to 10 Agitator Standard The current display indicates the density of the product 350 5 to 20 Mixer Standard The current display indicates the density of the product 350 5 to 10 Grinder Severe Braking to limit vibrations during stopping, overload control to detect jamming 450 5 to 60 Crusher Severe Braking to limit vibrations during stopping, overload control to detect jamming 400 10 to 40 Refiner Standard Torque control on starting and stopping 300 5 to 30 Press Severe Braking to increase the number of cycles 400 20 to 60 Contact your Schneider Electric field sales office for additional application information requiring: • Two-speed or wye-delta motors The ATS48 can operate with a 2-speed motor. A motor demagnetizing period must elapse before changing from low speed to high speed in order to avoid antiphase between the line supply and the motor, which would generate very high currents. • Motors other than NEMA Design B • High-efficiency motors • Low-slip motors • Low RPM motors 84 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information • Power factor correction capacitors Do not connect power factor correction capacitors to the terminals of a motor controlled by an ATS48 soft start. The power factor capacitors must be controlled and connected to a line side contactor sequenced by the ATS48 at the end of starting. • Controller oversizing of more than 50% • Multi-motor applications Motors may be connected in parallel provided that the power limit of the starter is not exceeded (the sum of the motor currents must not exceed the nominal current of the starter selected, depending on the type of application). Individual thermal protection and local disconnect is required for each motor. • Non-standard trip characteristics • Modifications not listed in this pricing guide • Horsepower greater than those listed in this catalog • Long mother cable lengths Very long motor cables cause voltage drops due to the resistance of the cable. If the voltage drop is significant, it could affect the current consumption and the torque available. This factor must be taken into account when selecting the motor and the starter. • Miscellaneous application precautions Do not use the ATS48 controller upstream of loads other than motors (for example, transformers and resistance type loads). Standard Duty Altistart® 48 Soft Starts with Circuit Breaker Disconnects (Pumps, Fans, Lightly Loaded, or Unloaded Starting Applications) Motor-rated horsepower shown for convenience only. Size per actual motor full load amperes. For severe duty applications, choose the next higher horsepower size. Starter Type and Horsepower 200V 230V 460V 3 – – – – 5 – 10 – 5 – – – – 15 – 7.5 – 7.5 – – – – – 10 20 – 10 – – – – – Soft Start Max. Unit Frame Amps C/B Amps 10 14 15 20 25 20 16 30 21 40 24 45 D32 27 28 50 – 25 D38 30 34 60 – 15 30 – D47 40 42 80 15 – – – – 20 – 40 – D62 46 52 54 90 20 – – – – 25 – 50 – D75 59 65 68 100 25 – – – – 30 – 60 – D88 74 77 80 110 30 – – – – 75 C11 88 96 125 – 40 – 104 150 D17 Space (Inches) ➀ IEC Contactors NEMA Contactors 30 39 30 42 D22 ➀ 11/03 Space shown is applicable to NEMA 1, 1A, 12, and 3R enclosures. Options may require additional space. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 85 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Soft Start Units Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ Soft Start Max. Unit Frame Amps 460V C/B Amps 200V 230V 40 – – 114 175 – – – 50 100 – 124 130 200 50 – – 143 200 – – 60 – – 125 C17 154 156 225 60 – – – – 75 – 150 – C21 169 180 192 250 75 – – 211 300 – – – 100 200 – C25 240 248 350 100 – – – – 125 – 250 – C32 273 302 312 400 125 – – 343 500 – – 150 – – 300 C41 360 361 600 150 – – – – 350 C48 396 414 600 – – – 200 400 – C59 477 480 800 200 – – 528 800 – – – 250 500 – 590 604 900 C14 C66 Space (Inches) ➀ IEC Contactors NEMA Contactors 42 60 72 (20W) 72 (30W) 72 (35W) 72 (35W) 72 (35W) N/A Space shown is applicable to NEMA 1, 1A, 12, and 3R enclosures. Options may require additional space. Standard Duty Altistart® 48 Soft Starts with Fusible Switch Disconnects (Pumps, Fans, Lightly Loaded, or Unloaded Starting Applications) Motor-rated horsepower shown for convenience only. Size per actual motor full load amperes. For severe duty applications, choose the next higher horsepower size. Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ Soft Start Frame Max. Unit Amps C/B Amps D17 10 14 15 17 30 (J) 200V 230V 460V 575V 3 – – – – – 5 – – 10 – – – – – 15 5 – – – 16 30 (J) – – – – – 7.5 15 – – – 20 – D22 21 22 24 60 (J) 7.5 – – – – 10 – 20 – – 25 – D32 24 27 28 60 (J) 10 – – – – – – – 25 – 30 – D38 30 32 34 60 (J) – – – – – 15 30 – – – 40 – D47 40 41 42 100 (J) Space (Inches) ➀ IEC Contactors NEMA Contactors 30 39 Space shown is applicable to NEMA 1, 1A, 12, and 3R enclosures. Options may require additional space. 86 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information Starter Type and Horsepower ➀ 11/03 Soft Start Frame Max. Unit Amps C/B Amps 200V 230V 460V 575V 15 – – – – 20 – 40 – – 50 – D62 46 52 54 100 (J) 20 – – – – – – 25 – – 50 – – 60 – – D75 59 62 65 68 200 (J) 25 – – – – 30 – 60 – – 75 – D88 74 77 80 200 (J) 30 – – – – – – 40 – 75 – – – – 100 – C11 88 96 99 104 200 (J) 40 – – – 114 200 (J) – – – – – 50 100 – – – 125 – C14 124 125 130 400 (J) 50 – – – – – 60 – – – – 125 – 150 – – C17 143 144 154 156 400 (J) 60 – – – – 75 – 150 – – – 200 C21 169 180 192 400 (J) 75 – – – 211 400 (J) – – – – – 100 200 – – – 250 – C25 240 242 248 600 (J) 100 – – – – – – 125 – – 250 – – 300 – – C32 273 289 302 312 600 (J) – 125 – – – – 350 – C41 343 343 600 (J) – – 150 – – 300 – – 360 361 800 (L) – 150 – – – – – – 350 400 – – C48 382 396 414 800 (L) – – – – – 200 – 400 – 500 – – C59 472 477 480 1000 (L) 200 – – – 528 1000 (L) – – – – – 250 – 500 – 600 – – 580 590 604 1200 (L) C66 Space (Inches) ➀ IEC Contactors NEMA Contactors 30 42 42 60 72 (30W) 72 (30W) 72 (35W) 72 (35W) 72 (35W) N/A Space shown is applicable to NEMA 1, 1A, 12, and 3R enclosures. Options may require additional space. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 87 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Soft Start Units Altistart® Unit Power Options Space Adder (Inches) Description Soft Start Frame IEC Contactors NEMA Contactors Input Isolation Contactor (Replaces the standard shunt trip disconnect. Standard feature if Reversing or Full Voltage Bypass is chosen.) As an option, MCC Soft Start units can include an input contactor to isolate the Soft Start in case of a fault condition instead of a shunt trip disconnect. The input contactor also opens when the motor is not in use. This provides protection from voltage transients when the electronics are most susceptible to damage. Control power is maintained after the input contactor is opened so fault diagnostics are available. D17-D47 15 27 D62-C11 18 15 C14-C17 18 12 (5 inches added to width) C21-C32 10 inches added to width for C/B version only 20 inches added to width C41-C66 (IEC) or C41-C59 (NEMA) 0 20 inches added to width D17-D47 15 27 D62-C11 18 27 C14-C17 18 12 (5 inches added to width) C21-C32 10 inches added to width for C/B version only 20 inches added to width C41-C66 (IEC) or C41-C59 (NEMA) 0 20 inches added to width D17-D47 15 D62-C11 18 Integrated Full Voltage Bypass Starter (Includes Input Isolation Contactor) As an option, MCC Soft Start units can include a full voltage bypass to allow emergency full voltage starting of the motor in case the Soft Starter is unable to be used. This feature includes necessary control and power circuitry to start the motor with full voltage using a bypass enable/disable selector switch. A Class 20 overload relay is provided to protect the motor in the bypass mode. The bypass contactor also acts as a shorting contactor in the soft start mode. Not available with Reversing Capability. Reversing Capability (Includes Input Isolation Contactor) Not available with NEMA Contactors or Full Voltage Bypass. C14-C17 18 C21-C32 10 inches added to width for C/B version only C41-C66 20 inches added to width N/A Altistart Unit Control Circuit Variations Description Application Unfused separate 120 V control circuit with control power disconnect Standard on all starters Fused separate 120 V control circuit with control power disconnect Space (Inches) Includes one fuse and control circuit interlock SPDT Operating mechanism interlock (added to Form FT) 0 DPDT Standard capacity fused control power transformer 150 VA additional capacity All frame sizes 88 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Soft Start Units Application and General Information Altistart® Unit Control Options Description Space (Inches) 1.5–30 sec. start delay Unwired 2N.O./2N.C. D line relay 0 if one per starter; 3 for up to three max. Unwired 2N.O./N.C. D line relay; 1N.O./1N.C. 10–180 sec. on delay timer Unwired 2N.O./N.C. D line relay; 1N.O./1N.C. 10–180 sec. off delay timer Pilot Lights (max. five devices) On pilot light (Red) Off pilot light (Green) Power On pilot light (Blue) Fault pilot light (Yellow) On pilot light (Green) Off pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Green) LED Pilot Lights (max. five devices) On pilot light (Red) Off pilot light (Green) Fault pilot light (Yellow) On pilot light (Green) Off pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Green) Push To Test Pilot Lights (max. five devices) On pilot light (Red) Off pilot light (Green) 0 Fault pilot light (Yellow) On pilot light (Green) Off pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Green) LED Push To Test Pilot Lights (max. five devices) On pilot light (Red) Off pilot light (Green) Fault pilot light (Yellow) On pilot light (Green) Off pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Red) Special function pilot light (Green) Pilot Devices (max. five devices) Start/Stop push buttons Hand/Off/Auto selector switch Forward/Off/Reverse selector switch Stop/Run selector switch Hand/Auto selector switch and Start/Stop push buttons 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 89 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Description Soft Start Units Space (Inches) Emergency Off push button, maintained contact Substitute Type K (max. three devices) Meter Options Current Meter—Analog, 2.5-inch panel type, 0-200% of nominal motor current Elapsed Time Meter Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks 0 Run contacts, 1 Form C, 5A @ 120VAC (8501 Type R relay) Bypass Run contacts, 1 Form C, 5A @ 120VAC (8501 Type R relay) Requires Integrated Full Voltage Bypass (Form U503) Auto Mode contacts, 1 Form C, 5A @ 120VAC (8501 Type R relay) Requires Hand/Off/Auto Switch Fault contacts, 1 Form C, 5A @ 120VAC (8501 Type R relay) Communication Network - Modbus® - Modbus Plus - DeviceNet - Profibus - Ethernet 90 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Automatic Transfer Switches Application and General Information Automatic Transfer Switches with Microprocessor Control Panel Standard Features Voltage and Frequency Sensing Close differential voltage sensing on all phases of normal source. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal, and the dropout is adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value. Factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 85% of nominal unless otherwise specified. Standard feature 4B. Single phase voltage sensing of emergency source. Pickup adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal. Factory set to pick up at 90% unless otherwise specified. Frequency sensing of emergency source. Pickup adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal. Factory set to pick up at 95% unless otherwise specified. Automatic Transfer Switch Time Delays Time delay overrides momentary normal source outages to delay all transfer switch and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds. Factory set at 1 second unless otherwise specified. Standard feature 1. Re-transfer to normal time delay. Time delay is automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and normal source is available. Adjustable from 0.5 to 30 minutes. Factory set at 30 minutes unless otherwise specified. Standard feature 3A. Unloaded running time delay for emergency engine generator cool down. Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes unless otherwise specified. Standard feature 2E. Transfer to emergency time delay. Adjustable from 0 to 1 minute. Factory set at 0 minutes unless otherwise specified. Standard feature 2B. Engine Control Contacts A contact that closes when normal source fails. Gold-plated contacts for low voltage engine start signals or other customer use. Rated 10 A, 32 Vdc. Standard feature 7. A contact that opens when normal source fails. Gold-plated contact for low voltage engine start signals or other customer use. Rated 10 A, 32 Vdc. Standard feature 8. Manual Controls Test switch (TGL) with gold-plated low voltage contacts to momentarily simulate normal source failure. Standard feature 5. Indicators One auxiliary contact closed when automatic transfer switch is connected to normal. Standard feature 14A. One auxiliary contact closed when automatic transfer switch is connected to emergency. Standard feature 14B. Signal light PL1, indicates when automatic transfer switch is connected to normal source (green). Standard feature 9A. Signal light PL2, indicates when automatic transfer switch is connected to emergency source (red). Standard feature 9B. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 91 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Automatic Transfer Switches Emergency Transfer Inhibit Terminal provisions for remote customer contact to inhibit automatic transfer switch from transferring to emergency source. Standard feature 34B. Remote Automatic Transfer Switch Circuits Terminal provisions for remote customer contact that opens to signal automatic transfer switch to transfer to emergency. Standard feature 17. Automatic Transfer Switches With Microprocessor Control Panel (Non-UL Listed) Rating Lug Range Space (Inches) 3PH/3W – (Can be used with solid neutral through 800 A; Accessory 22) 30 A (1) #14–#6 36: Must be top or bottom located 70 A (1) #14–1/0 36: Must be top or bottom located 100 A (1) #14–2/0 36: Must be top or bottom located 150 A (1) #8–3/0 42: Must be top or bottom located 260 A (1) #4–400MCM 42: Must be top or bottom located 400 A (1) #4–600MCM or (2) 1/0–250MCM 600 A (3) #2–600MCM 72 (25 W x 20 D) ➀ 800 A (3) #2–600MCM 72 (25 W x 20 D) ➀ 72 (20 W) ➀ 3PH/4W with Switched Neutral (Accessory 28) ➀ 30 A (1) #14–#6 36: Must be top or bottom located 70 A (1) #14–1/0 36: Must be top or bottom located 100 A (1) #14–2/0 36: Must be top or bottom located 42: Must be top or bottom located 150 A (1) #8–3/0 260 A (1) #4–400MCM 72 (20 W) ➀ 400 A (1) #4–600MCM or (2) 1/0–250MCM 72 (25 W) ➀ 600 A (3) #2–600MCM 72 (30 W x 20 D) ➀ 800 A (3) #2–600MCM 72 (30 W x 20 D) ➀ No vertical bus or vertical wireway. 92 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Automatic Transfer Switches Application and General Information Automatic Transfer Switches with Microprocessor Control Panel—Options Description Note 18 in. additional space required for 30 A–260 A switches; no additional space required on larger switches. Accessory panel required for some accessories. (The “Note” column indicates when this panel is required.) AP Extended time delay on engine start. 2C Requires accessory panel option AP. 3-phase differential voltage sensing of alternate source. 4E Requires accessory panel option AP. 3-phase overvoltage sensing of normal source. 4H Requires accessory panel option AP. Reset switch to manually bypass time delay on retransfer to normal. 6B — Reset switch to manually retransfer to normal source after time delay. 6C — Toggle and selector switches to permit manual or automatic reset to normal. 6D — Normal/alternate source available pilot lights. 9C/9D — Push-to-test pilot lights for connected-to-normal and connected-to-emergency source. 9E/9F — 11C — Engine generator exercise timer with switch to select with load or without load. Three position engine control switch: Stop/Auto/Engine Test. 11/03 Accessory Code 12 — (1) auxiliary contact that closes when switch is connected to normal source (1 is supplied as standard). Specify total quantity if more than one is required (up to 3). For 30 A–150 A, 260 A–400 A, 600 A–800 A, and 1000 A–1200 A switches 14A (1) auxiliary contact that closes when switch is connected to emergency source (1 is supplied as standard). Specify total quantity if more than one is required (up to 3). 14B Solid neutral for 3-wire switch. (Cannot be used if either source has ground fault protection. Not available above 800 A.) 22 In-phase monitor for motor loads; monitors sources and retransfers to normal when both sources are in-phase; prevents excess transients on transfer. 27 — Equipment ground lug 33 — For 30 A–100 A, 150 A, 260 A, 400 A, 600 A, and 800 A switches © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 93 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information OMNI Centers Model 6 OMNI Center The Model 6 OMNI (Open Multi-Network Integration) Center family of "intelligent" Motor Control Centers offers enhancements to the Model 6 MCC, while providing reduced acquisition, installation, and commissioning costs. The Model 6 OMNI Center offers the ability to be customized to meet any application. OMNI Basic The OMNI Basic solution offers a hard-wired I/O system that provides basic information and control capabilities. Choose various distributed I/O configurations with unit mounting or full section mounting to meet specific application needs. The complete system I/O are connected to the appropriate combination unit, drive, or soft starter and tested prior to shipment. Control Power Distribution Control power distribution in the MCC significantly affects PLC configuration and the electrical isolation between connections at the PLC inputs and outputs. Two configurations are available for distributing control power throughout the MCC: individual control power transformer and common control power. Individual control power distribution uses transformers mounted in each unit or full section of the MCC to provide power. Common control power distribution uses a single control power transformer to provide power common to all units and sections in the MCC. These two distribution schemes are sometimes combined, where individual control transformers provide power for outputs and common control provides power for the inputs. This combination allows mixing of isolated outputs with non-isolated inputs on a control device. Common control power distribution may also include separate source control power, where a power source completely isolated from the MCC, such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS), is used to provide control power instead of a transformer in the MCC. PLC inputs and outputs may be either isolated or non-isolated. If non-isolated inputs are used, common control power should also be used. Isolated outputs are typically used in applications with individual control power transformers. Separate-source control power applications require the use of a disconnect means (NEC Article 430-74). Interposing relays must be specified when controlling Size 3 or larger starters, or when deemed necessary by the application. Two methods are used for locating the control power supply components in MCCs. The components may be included in the space equipped with a PLC, or they can be located in a separate unit in the MCC. Functionally, locating the control power in a separate unit provides more isolation from high voltage for the PLC and increases the space available for PLC components in the unit or full-section configurations. Control power supply units should be placed directly above the PLC. The unit configuration of a control power supply uses a 6 in. unit consisting of a circuit breaker functioning as a molded case switch disconnect, a control power transformer, a 24 Vdc supply (optional), and appropriate fusing and terminal blocks. Two standard power supply units are available. They include: • 6 in. unit with 150 VA CPT, 24 Vdc at 2.4 A, disconnect, and fusing • 6 in. unit with 500 VA CPT, 120 Vac, disconnect, and fusing NOTE: Larger capacity power supplies are available. PLC Connections in the MCC To effectively control a typical combination motor starter, a minimum of one input and one output is required. The input monitors the contactor status and the output energizes the contactor coil, either directly in Size 1 and 2 starters or indirectly through interposing relays in Size 3 or larger starters. In more complex applications, additional inputs may be monitored, such as overload relay status, control power availability, or local control mechanism position. 94 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers OMNI Centers Application and General Information Quantum™ PLC High-end PLC optimized for process control and large end user installations. True hot standby capabilities and the most communication network options. Maximum I/O • • • Digital 64K max any mix with 8/16/ 32/64 pt. modules Digital/analog mixed modules All Quantum modules are hot swappable I/O Type Memory Communications Features • Quantum I/O • Ethernet TCP/IP • Multi-axis motion • Momentum I/O • Modbus® • • 800 Series I/O • Modbus Plus Fully-functional in-rack web server • 200 Series I/O • Profibus • • SY/MAX™ I/O Total memory: 4MB • Interbus • Local I/O • 2.5MB program Hot standby /redundant CPU, power supplies, communication, I/O • Remote I/O • 1.5MB data/ variables • Lonworks • Devicenet • Distributed I/O • SERCOS • Redundant I/O • ASi • Intrinsically safe I/ O (FM Class1, Div1) • Seriplex® • Hart • Motion control • Confromal coating • FM Class1, Div2 for Quantum family • IEC 61131-3 programming languages Premium™ PLC Mid-range PLC that fits a broad range of applications. Optimized for discrete manufacturing. Maximum I/O • • I/O Type 1024 digital, any mix, with 8/16/32/ 64 pt. hot swappable modules • Premium I/O • Momentum I/O • Bus I/O • Local I/O 80 analog, any mix, with 4/8/16 pt. hot swappable modules • High density I/O • Remote I/O • IP67 I/O Memory Total memory: 176KB plus 640KB via PCMCIA Communications Features • Ethernet TCP/IP • Modbus • Multi-axis motion • Modbus Plus • • Profibus Fully-functional in-rack web server • Interbus • • FIP Special purpose I/O: - web server - stepper - high speed counter - weighing - safety - electronic cam. ISA slot mounted CPU • Configurable program • Configurable data/ • variables • • UniTelway Jnet SERCOS • ASi • CAN • Momentum™ PLC Small footprint, modular PLC and/or I/O system for small to mid-range applications. Optimized for distributed architectures. Supports multiple communication networks. Maximum I/O • • • 11/03 16 or 32 digital I/O base units 4/8/16 channel multifunction analog I/O base units Max. 8192 I/O I/O Type • Fixed I/O module bases • Local I/O • Distributed I/O Memory Total memory: 1MB • 18K user logic • 24K data Communications Features • Ethernet TCP/IP • Modbus • Modbus Plus • Profibus • Diagnostic Web pages • Interbus • High speed counters • Devicenet • I/O base with Modbus master • FIPIO • Option adapters • Seriplex • Save-to-Flash Memory capability with Concept V2.5, 2.06d © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 95 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information OMNI Centers Micro PLC Small, cost-effective PLC optimized for standalone machines and some distributed architecture. Maximum I/O I/O Type Memory Communications Features 8/12/32 input modules • Total memory: 72KB plus 128KB via PCMCIA • RS485 • Safety module Modbus® • • 4/8/32 output modules • • • Remote I/O • ASi • 8/28/64 mixed I/O modules • IP67 I/O Integrated I/O: - 8 analog I/P - 1 analog O/P - 1 10kHz counter 248 digital I/O with: • Fixed and modular I/O High density I/O • Configurable program • Configurable data/ • variables CAN Nano PLC Very small, cost-effective PLC optimized for standalone machines and some distributed architecture. Maximum I/O 48 I/O (one base unit and one extension) I/O Type • 10/16/24 I/O base units • 16 or 24 digital I/O module • Memory Total Memory: 128K Communications Features • RS485 • High speed counter • Modbus (slave) • High speed outputs 3 I/P and 1 O/P analog module Compact PLC PLC for small to mid-range applications. Special features make Compact ideal for RTU applications. Maximum I/O • • Digital, 16K max any mix with 4/8/ 16 pt. Analog modules with 4/8/16 channel with multifunction capability I/O Type Memory Communications • A120 Series I/O • Momentum I/O Total memory: 1MB • Modbus • Local I/O (18 modules max.) • 620K program • Modbus Plus • Profibus Remote I/O 96K data/ variables • • • Interbus • Distributed I/O Features • Extended temp. (-40C to +70C) • Conformal coating • Starling gas flow loadables • Motion control • IEC 61131-3 programming languages • True RTU with functionality • XMIT loadables Twido™ Ultra-Compact PLC A hard-working ultra-compact controller especially designed for simple standalone applications and compact machines. Flexible, affordable, and adaptable, Twido makes it easy to build just the right control solution for your application. Maximum I/O I/O Type Memory Communications Features • 56 I/O (up to seven expansion modules) • 10/16/24 I/O compact bases • 20/40 I/O modular bases • 8/16/24/32 discrete I/O expansion modules • 1/2/3 I/O analog expansion modules • Pulse outputs • Analog timers (potentiometer and 8 bit analog input) Modbus master/ slave • Program storage with embedded eeprom • ASCII • • Remote I/O / peer PLC link Optional additional serial port (RS485 or RS232) • Optional small operator display and plug-in memory enables sharing/updating of programs • Total memory: Up to 3000 instructions (6000 instructions with memory expansion) High-speed counters (up to 4 counters, 5kHz and 20 kHz) • RS485 multiprotocol terminal port 96 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers OMNI Centers Application and General Information Model 6 OMNI Center-Flex The OMNI Center-Flex control bus solution is designed for maximum flexibility to meet the widest variety of applications and industry needs. The Flex option provides a simple and cost-effective way to network all of your motor control and distribution units together. Additions and changes to the MCC are simplified. Units can be easily relocated within the MCC without impact on the control wiring. Empty spaces or sections can be "Control Bus Ready" to accept add-on Flex units. All control wiring to MCC devices is made with one connection. Benefits • • • • • • • Multiple network interfaces available Reduced installation cost Faster start-ups Easy to install and maintain Each I/O point is factory wired and tested prior to shipment Reduced hardware and software requirements Eliminates traditional automation hardware and wiring requirements Connectivity By using Seriplex® technology, a 5-conductor communication cable eliminates the bundled wiring requirements of typical hardwired I/O automation solutions. Seriplex I/O Control Modules are mounted in each Flex MCC unit and hard wired to the starter or other device. The Control Modules are then connected to a UL 600V cabling system, which interconnects units within the MCC. The connection utilizes a pre-molded 5-pole keyed micro-style connector. The Flex Control Bus MCC can communicate to one of multiple network protocols such as Modbus® Plus, DeviceNet, Ethernet and Profibus via a Momentum/Seriplex Interface. Simple configuration of the interface will map the entire MCC as a single network drop. Only minimal network management is required. Control Modules within Flex units come pre-addressed from the factory. Each Seriplex network in an MCC has a maximum I/O count of 240 inputs and 240 outputs. If additional capacity is required, an additional Seriplex network can be added. Description Application I/O module (2 input, hard contact) Main and branches Space Added Shipping Code 0 G I/O module (2 input) I/O module (2 output) I/O module (2 input / 2 output) Qty (2) I/O module (4 input / 4 output) Starters, drives, and soft starts Full voltage starters I/O module (2 input / 3 ATV 58 drive output / 1 analog output) 0 Seriplex TSX-Quantum PLC Interface PLC space 0 Momentum / Seriplex Master Individual unit 9 Unit space 6 G 0 E H Control power supply unit 50 VA / 24 Vdc Auxiliary power supply unit 500 VA / 115 Vac 120 Vac starter interposing relay Size 3–5 starters 24 Vdc starter interposing relay Surge suppressor 11/03 All starters © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 97 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information OMNI Centers OMNI Basic with Data Acquisition The OMNI Basic with Data Acquisition solution offers the same hard-wired I/O system as in the OMNI Basic solution with the addition of an independent data acquisition system. A Modbus® or DeviceNet network is included to gather information from intelligent components. Unit Mounts Dimensions Full Sections 20 in. wide 25 in. wide 30 in. wide 35 in. wide 12 in. 18 in. (13.5 in. x 11 in.) (13.5 in. x 17 in.) (16.4 in. x 63.4 in.) (21.4 in. x 63.4 in.) (26.4 in. x 63.4 in.) (31.4 in. x 63.4 in.) PLC Type Momentum 2 modules 4 modules 12 modules 18 modules 24 modules 30 modules Modicon® Micro One PLC (fixed I/O) and power supply Two PLCs (fixed I/O) up to five interconnected PLCs up to five interconnected PLCs up to five interconnected PLCs up to five interconnected PLCs Compact up to one 5-slot rack plus one 2-slot rack up to two 5-slot racks up to two 5-slot racks up to four 5-slot racks up to four 5-slot racks up to four 5-slot racks TSX Quantum N/A up to one 6-slot backplane up to four 6-slot backplanes up to four 10-slot backplanes up to four 10-slot backplanes up to four 16-slot backplanes TSX Premium N/A up to one 8-slot backplane up to four 8-slot backplanes up to four 12-slot backplanes up to four 12-slot backplanes up to four 12-slot backplanes NOTE: The configurations shown above represent the maximum PLC component densities available. Power distribution, power supplies, component selection, communication protocol, fusing, interposing relays, and Cablefast modules affect the actual component densities. Features/Options • • • • • • • Viewing window fabricated in the door Convenience electrical outlet Communications connector (for external programming) Convenience lighting for full-section configurations Interposing terminal blocks Fused outputs Auxiliary 24 Vdc power supply Model 6 OMNI Center-Enhanced The OMNI Enhanced solution integrates control and data into one common network. The OMNI Enhanced solution provides motor information and protection via the Motor Logic® Plus overload relay in each motor starter unit. These capabilities allow for early detection and correction of problems. Information Available • • • • • • • Current: individual phase and three-phase average Voltage: phase-to-phase and three phase average Thermal capacity remaining Trip indication and fault history Power factor Ground fault current Current and voltage unbalance 98 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers OMNI Centers Application and General Information Motor Logic® Plus Displays Motor Logic Plus display modules are now available for monitoring or monitoring and control of Motor Control Center (MCC) combination starter units. Both the overload central monitoring display and motor management system display may be used to commission, program, and monitor overload functions. Motor Logic Plus Overload Central Monitoring Display Featuring a six button membrane keypad with a 2 by 16 LCD display, the Motor Logic Plus overload central monitoring display provides functionality for status, change setpoints and Modbus® networking. The Motor Logic Plus overload central monitoring display has the ability to monitor up to 16 Motor Logic Plus solid state overloads or can be mounted on individual starters. In addition, the overload central monitoring display provides a second communication port allowing monitoring and control from an upstream device. Key Features: • Indicates last four faults and fault pending • Communication setup parameters • Setpoints are displayed and changed from the keypad: — Low and high voltage — Voltage and current unbalance — Over and under current — RD1, RD2, and RD3 — GF current trip threshold Communication Ports Modbus® RTU Master to MLP Modbus Slave to Network Setup None, Odd, or Even None, Odd, or Even Baud rate 9600-19200 9600-19200 Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Available addresses A01-A16 A01-A99 Serial interface RS485 RS485 Motor Logic Plus Motor Management System Display Used in conjunction with Motor Logic Plus overload relays, this device combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly motor monitoring. This display has membrane keypad controls that allow both monitoring and control of a Motor Logic Plus starter through an RS485 network using Modbus RTU protocol and I/O on the display unit. The upstream Modbus communication port is standard and allows monitoring and control of up to 99 Motor Logic Plus starters from a computer, PLC, DCS, or SCADA system. An optional DeviceNet MMS-D display is also available, allowing an upstream port to be connected to a DeviceNet network for data acquisition and control. Key Features: • • • • • • Device is environmentally protected Easily mounts on the front of a motor starter Allows control of the motor starter contactor via an output on the display Provides two user configurable inputs Reduces installation and wiring requirements Indicates the following through status LEDs: motor is running, faulted and communications are working properly between the display and overload. • Indicates the following through Mode of Operation LEDs: which mode the display is in; real time data; fault history; setpoint; setup and change setpoint mode 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 99 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information OMNI Centers • Can access the following motor management information: — Total motor run-time (re-settable) — Time and date of last four faults, along with voltage and current at time of trip — Time and date of last 10 motor starts — Total number of motor restarts (re-settable) — Minimum time between any two starts with time and date (re-settable) — Run-time since last start (re-settable) — KWH and KVARs consumed (re-settable) Communication Ports Setup Modbus® RTU Master to MLP Modbus Slave to Network Even parity None, Odd, or Even Baud rate 19200 9600-19200 Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Available addresses A01 A01-A99 Serial interface RS485 RS485 Technical Specifications Motor Logic® Plus Overload Central Monitoring Display Motor Logic Plus Motor Management System Display Control Voltage 10-24Vdc or powered from MB22 communications module. 115VAC +/- 10%; 50-60 Hz Power Consumption 1 Watt 3 Watts (maximum) Dimensions 3.3” H x 4.6” W x 0.94” D 6.1” H x 6.5” W x 1.1” D Weight 0.5 lbs 1.2 lbs Material UV stabilized black polycarbonate UV stabilized black polycarbonate Real-time Clock N/A Ten years @ 25°C without external power Output Relays Pilot Duty Rating General Purpose N/A SPDT; Silver/Tin Oxide 240VA @ 120 VAC 10A @ 120 VAC Enclosure Type NEMA 3R NEMA 3R Ambient Operating Temperature -20–70°C -20–70°C Ambient Storage Temperature -30–70°C -30–70°C Humidity Up to 85% non-condensing Up to 85% non-condensing Display Liquid crystal with extended temperature range, 2 rows x 16 characters Liquid crystal with extended temperature range, 2 rows x 20 characters; LED back-lit Last Fault Memory N/A Stores last faults with time and date stamp, including voltages and current at time of trip Keypad N/A Eight, 1/2-inch stainless steel dome buttons for tactile Terminal N/A Depluggable terminal block 100 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Thermal Overload Unit Selection Application and General Information Thermal Overload Relay Unit Selection This section identifies the thermal overload units needed for the starters specified in an order. Tables are based on motor full-load amps and provide the catalog number for the appropriate thermal units to be used at that current rating. Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables for All Types of Combination Starter Units Except Part-Winding Starter Units Size 1 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 11/03 0.56–0.63 B 0.81 3.23–3.49 B 4.85 0.64–0.68 B 0.92 3.50–3.85 B 5.50 0.69–0.77 B 1.03 3.86–4.11 B 6.25 4.12–4.70 B 6.90 0.78–0.85 B 1.16 0.86–0.97 B 1.30 4.71–5.21 B 7.70 0.98–1.09 B 1.45 5.22–5.53 B 8.20 1.10–1.21 B 1.67 5.54–6.17 B 9.10 6.18–7.02 B 10.2 1.22–1.33 B 1.88 1.34–1.53 B 2.10 7.03–7.92 B 11.5 1.54–1.73 B 2.40 7.93–8.61 B 12.8 1.74–1.89 B 2.65 8.62–9.17 B 14 9.18–10.0 B 15.5 1.90–2.17 B 3.00 2.18–2.53 B 3.30 10.1–11.0 B 17.5 2.54–2.87 B 3.70 11.1–11.8 B 19.5 2.88–3.22 B 4.15 11.9–13.5 B 22 13.6–15.3 B 25 15.4–17.4 B 28 17.5–19.4 B 32 19.5–22.2 B 36 22.3–25.1 B 40 25.2–27.0 B 45 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 101 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Thermal Overload Unit Selection Size 2 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 3.94–4.45 B 6.90 11.5–12.3 B 19.5 4.46–4.97 B 7.70 12.4–13.9 B 22 14.0–15.8 B 25 15.9–17.9 B 28 4.98–5.28 B 8.20 5.29–5.97 B 9.10 5.98–6.89 B 10.2 18.0–19.9 B 32 6.90–7.92 B 11.5 20.0–22.8 B 36 22.9–25.4 B 40 7.93–8.71 B 12.8 25.5–28.9 B 45 8.72–9.27 B 14.0 9.28–10.2 B 15.5 29.0–30.8 B 50 10.3–11.4 B 17.5 30.9–32.5 B 56 32.6–34.9 B 62 35.0–39.7 B 70 39.8–44.7 B 79 Size 3 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 14.0–14.9 CC 20.9 34.1–36.8 CC 54.5 15.0–16.2 CC 22.8 36.9–39.8 CC 59.4 16.3–17.2 CC 24.6 39.9–42.3 CC 64.3 17.3–18.7 CC 26.3 42.4–45.7 CC 68.5 18.8–20.2 CC 28.8 45.8–49.2 CC 74.6 20.3–21.7 CC 31.0 49.3–52.8 CC 81.5 21.8–23.3 CC 33.3 52.9–56.8 CC 87.7 23.4–25.2 CC 36.4 56.9–61.2 CC 94.0 25.3–27.1 CC 39.6 61.3–66.1 CC 103 27.2–29.4 CC 42.7 66.2–71.2 CC 112 29.5–31.6 CC 46.6 71.3–76.7 CC 121 31.7–34.0 CC 50.1 76.8–82.9 CC 132 83.0–90.0 CC 143 Size 4 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 44.0–46.8 CC 64.3 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 73.0–78.1 CC 112 46.9–50.6 CC 68.5 78.2–83.9 CC 121 50.7–54.5 CC 74.6 84.0–91.1 CC 132 54.6–58.4 CC 81.5 91.2–97.5 CC 143 58.5–62.9 CC 87.7 97.6–104 CC 156 63.0–67.7 CC 94.0 105–113 CC 167 67.8–72.9 CC 103 114–133 CC 180 102 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Thermal Overload Unit Selection Application and General Information Size 5 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 88.2–95.1 DD 112 171–180 95.2–101 DD 121 181–197 DD 220 DD 240 102–111 DD 128 198–204 DD 250 112–119 DD 140 205–213 DD 265 120–131 DD 150 214–237 DD 280 132–149 DD 160 238–243 DD 300 150–170 DD 185 244–266 DD 320 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Circuit Breakers Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 40.8–45.5 B 1.03 105–114 B 2.65 45.6–49.9 B 1.16 115–128 B 3.00 51.0–57.5 B 1.30 129–140 B 3.30 57.6–65.9 B 1.45 141–160 B 3.70 66.0–73.1 B 1.67 161–193 B 4.15 73.2–81.5 B 1.88 194–209 B 4.85 81.6–92.3 B 2.10 210–232 B 5.50 92.4–104 B 2.40 233–248 B 6.25 249–266 B 6.90 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Fusible Switch Disconnects Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Max. Fuse Rating (A) Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Max. Fuse Rating (A) 40.8–45.5 B 1.03 90 115–128 B 3.00 250 45.6–49.9 B 1.16 100 129–140 B 3.30 250 51.0–57.5 B 1.30 110 141–160 B 3.70 300 57.6-65.9 B 1.45 125 161–193 B 4.15 350 66.0–73.1 B 1.67 125 194–209 B 4.85 400 73.2–81.5 B 1.88 150 210–232 B 5.50 400 84.6–92.3 B 2.10 175 233–248 B 6.25 400 92.4–104 B 2.40 200 249–266 B 6.90 400 105–114 B 2.65 225 Size 6 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 11/03 133–148 B 1.30 272–308 B 2.65 149–174 B 1.45 309–348 B 3.00 175–195 B 1.67 349–397 B 3.30 196–219 B 1.88 398–429 B 3.70 220–239 B 2.10 430–495 B 4.15 240–271 B 2.40 496–520 B 4.85 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 103 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables for Part Winding Combination Starter Units Only Size 1 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 1.12–1.27 B 0.81 6.46–6.99 B 4.85 1.28–1.37 B 0.92 7.00–7.71 B 5.50 1.38–1.55 B 1.30 7.72–8.23 B 6.25 8.24–9.41 B 6.90 1.56–1.71 B 1.16 1.72–1.95 B 1.30 9.42–10.43 B 7.70 1.96–2.19 B 1.45 10.44–11.07 B 8.20 2.20–2.43 B 1.67 11.08–12.35 B 9.10 12.36–14.05 B 10.2 2.44–2.67 B 1.88 2.68–3.07 B 2.10 14.06–15.85 B 11.5 3.08–3.47 B 2.40 15.86–17.23 B 12.8 3.48–3.79 B 2.65 17.24–18.35 B 14 18.36–20.1 B 15.5 3.80–4.35 B 3.00 4.36–5.07 B 3.30 20.2–22.1 B 17.5 5.08–5.75 B 3.70 22.2–23.7 B 19.5 5.76–6.45 B 4.15 23.8–27.1 B 22 27.2–30.7 B 25 30.8–34.9 B 28 35.0–38.9 B 32 39.0–44.5 B 36 44.6–50.3 B 40 50.4–54.0 B 45 Size 2 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 7.88–8.91 B 6.90 23.0–24.7 B 19.5 8.92–9.95 B 7.70 24.8–27.9 B 22 28.0–31.7 B 25 9.96–10.57 B 8.20 31.8–35.9 B 28 10.58–11.95 B 9.10 11.96–13.79 B 10.2 36.0–39.9 B 32 13.80–15.85 B 11.5 40.0–45.7 B 36 45.8–50.9 B 40 51.0–61.7 B 45 B 50 15.86–17.43 B 12.8 17.44–18.55 B 14.0 18.56–20.5 B 15.5 61.8–65.1 20.6–22.9 B 17.5 65.2–69.9 B 56 70.0–79.5 B 62 79.6–89.4 B 70 104 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables Application and General Information Size 3 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 28.0–29.9 CC 20.9 68.2–73.7 CC 54.5 30.0–32.5 CC 22.8 73.8–79.7 CC 59.4 32.6–34.5 CC 24.6 79.8–84.7 CC 64.3 34.6–37.5 CC 26.3 84.8–91.5 CC 68.5 37.6–40.5 CC 28.8 91.6–98.5 CC 74.6 40.6–43.5 CC 31.0 98.6–105.7 CC 81.5 43.6–46.7 CC 33.3 105.8–113.7 CC 87.7 46.8–50.5 CC 36.4 113.8–122.5 CC 94.0 50.6–54.3 CC 39.6 122.6–132.3 CC 103 54.4–58.9 CC 42.7 132.4–142.5 CC 112 59.0–63.3 CC 46.6 142.6–153.5 CC 121 63.4–68.1 CC 50.1 153.6–165.9 CC 132 166.0–180.0 CC 143 Size 4 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 105–112 CC 74.6 170–181 CC 132 113–122 CC 81.5 182–195 CC 143 123–131 CC 87.7 196–209 CC 156 132–142 CC 94.0 210–227 CC 167 143–153 CC 103 228–247 CC 180 154–157 CC 112 248–266 CC 196 158–169 CC 121 Size 5 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 11/03 176–190 DD 112 342–361 DD 220 191–203 DD 121 362–395 DD 240 204–223 DD 128 396–409 DD 250 224–239 DD 140 410–427 DD 265 240–253 DD 150 428–475 DD 289 254–299 DD 160 476–487 DD 300 300–341 DD 185 488–532 DD 320 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 105 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Melting Alloy Overload Selection Tables Size 5 with CT Overload with Circuit Breakers Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 81.6–91.1 B 1.03 230–257 B 3.00 91.2–101 B 1.16 258-281 B 3.30 102–115 B 1.30 282–321 B 3.70 116–131 B 1.45 322–387 B 4.15 132–146 B 1.67 388–419 B 4.85 147–163 B 1.84 420–465 B 5.50 164–184 B 2.10 466–497 B 6.25 185–209 B 2.40 496–532 B 6.90 210–229 B 2.65 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Fusible Switch Disconnects Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) 81.6–91.1 B 1.03 230–257 Thermal Unit Number B 3.00 91.2–101 B 1.16 258–281 B 3.30 102–115 B 1.30 282–321 B 3.70 116–131 B 1.45 322–387 B 4.15 132–146 B 1.67 388–419 B 4.35 147–163 B 1.88 420–465 B 5.60 164–184 B 2.10 466–497 B 6.25 185–209 B 2.40 498–532 B 6.90 210–229 B 2.65 106 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Selection Tables Application and General Information Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Relay Selection Tables for All Types of Combination Starter Units Except Part-Winding Starter Units Size 1 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 0.57–0.60 AR 1.05 3.46–3.81 AR 5.8 0.61–0.66 AR 1.15 3.82–4.20 AR 6.4 0.67–0.73 AR 1.26 4.21–4.65 AR 7.0 0.74–0.81 AR 1.39 4.66–5.29 AR 7.7 0.82–0.90 AR 1.53 5.30–5.84 AR 8.5 0.91–1.05 AR 1.68 5.85–6.27 AR 9.3 1.06–1.15 AR 1.85 6.28–6.97 AR 10.2 1.16–1.25 AR 2.04 6.98–7.59 AR 11.2 1.26–1.35 AR 2.24 7.60–7.89 AR 12.4 1.36–1.47 AR 2.46 7.90–8.95 AR 13.6 1.48–1.58 AR 2.71 8.96–10.3 AR 15.4 1.59–1.74 AR 2.98 10.4–11.7 AR 17.6 1.75–1.94 AR 3.28 11.8–13.3 AR 20.5 1.95–2.20 AR 3.62 13.4–15.2 AR 23 2.21–2.47 AR 3.98 15.3–17.2 AR 27 2.48–2.76 AR 4.37 17.3–19.7 AR 30 2.77–3.07 AR 4.80 19.8–22.4 AR 35 3.08–3.45 AR 5.3 22.5–26.0 AR 40 Size 2 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 4.24–4.62 AR 8.5 16.5–18.9 AR 35 4.63–5.05 AR 9.3 19.0–21.6 AR 40 5.06–5.54 AR 10.2 21.7–23.3 AR 44 5.55–6.13 AR 11.2 23.4–24.9 AR 47 6.14–6.44 AR 12.4 25.0–26.9 AR 51 6.45–7.48 AR 13.6 27.0–29.1 AR 55 7.49–8.55 AR 15.4 29.2–31.3 AR 60 8.56–9.74 AR 17.6 31.4–33.5 AR 66 9.75–11.1 AR 20.5 33.6–36.9 AR 72 11.2–12.7 AR 23 37.0–39.1 AR 79 12.8–14.4 AR 27 39.2–40.9 AR 86 14.5–16.4 AR 30 41.0–45.0 AR 94 Size 3 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) 11/03 Thermal Unit Number 27.1–30.0 E 67 30.1–33.2 E 69 33.3–35.7 E 70 35.8–39.4 E 71 51.6–57.0 E 76 39.5–43.4 E 72 57.1–62.8 E 77 43.5–46.9 E 73 62.9–69.1 E 78 47.0–51.5 E 74 69.2–75.0 E 79 75.1–83.3 E 80 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 107 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Selection Tables Size 4 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 50–55.9 E 88 82–86.9 E 96 56–60.9 E 89 87–92.9 E 97 61–65.9 E 91 93–97.9 E 98 66–69.9 E 92 98–107.9 E 99 70–75.9 E 93 108–113.9 E 101 76–81.9 E 94 114–125.9 E 102 Size 5 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 105–116 AR 3.28 166–184 AR 4.80 117–132 AR 3.62 185–207 AR 5.3 133–148 AR 3.98 208–229 AR 5.8 149–165 AR 4.37 230–266 AR 6.4 Size 6 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 146–169 AR 1.68 280–311 AR 3.28 170–185 AR 1.85 312–353 AR 3.62 186–201 AR 2.04 354–396 AR 3.98 202–217 AR 2.24 218–236 AR 2.46 397–442 AR 4.37 237–253 AR 2.71 443–492 AR 4.80 254–279 AR 2.98 493–520 AR 5.3 108 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Selection Tables Application and General Information Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Relay Selection Tables for Part Winding Combination Starter Units Only Size 1 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 1.14–1.21 AR 1.05 6.92–7.63 AR 5.8 1.22–1.33 AR 1.15 7.64–8.41 AR 6.4 1.34–1.47 AR 1.26 8.42–9.31 AR 7.0 1.48–1.63 AR 1.39 9.32–10.59 AR 7.7 1.64–1.81 AR 1.53 10.60–11.69 AR 8.5 1.82–2.11 AR 1.68 11.70–12.55 AR 9.3 2.12–2.31 AR 1.85 12.56–13.95 AR 10.2 2.32–2.51 AR 2.04 13.96–15.19 AR 11.2 2.52–2.71 AR 2.24 15.20–15.79 AR 12.4 2.72–2.95 AR 2.46 15.80–17.91 AR 13.6 2.96–3.17 AR 2.71 17.92–20.7 AR 15.4 3.18–3.49 AR 2.98 20.8–23.5 AR 17.6 3.50–3.89 AR 3.28 23.6–26.7 AR 20.5 3.90–4.41 AR 3.62 26.8–30.5 AR 23 4.42–4.95 AR 3.98 30.6–34.5 AR 27 4.96–5.53 AR 4.37 34.6–39.5 AR 30 5.54–6.15 AR 4.80 39.6–44.9 AR 35 6.16–6.91 AR 5.30 45.0–52.0 AR 40 Size 2 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 8.48–9.25 AR 8.5 33.0–37.9 AR 35 9.26–10.11 AR 9.3 38.0–43.3 AR 40 10.12–11.09 AR 10.2 43.4–46.7 AR 44 11.10–12.27 AR 11.2 46.8–49.9 AR 47 12.28–12.89 AR 12.4 50.0–53.9 AR 51 12.90–14.97 AR 13.6 54.0–58.3 AR 55 14.98–17.11 AR 15.4 58.4–62.7 AR 60 AR 66 17.12–19.49 AR 17.6 62.8–67.1 19.50–22.3 AR 20.5 67.2–73.8 AR 72 22.4–25.5 AR 23 74.0–78.3 AR 79 25.6–28.9 AR 27 78.4–81.9 AR 86 29.0–32.9 AR 30 82.0–90.0 AR 94 Size 3 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) 11/03 Thermal Unit Number 54.2–60.1 E 67 60.2–66.5 E 69 66.6–71.5 E 70 71.6–78.9 E 71 103.2–114.1 E 76 79.0–86.9 E 72 114.2–125.7 E 77 87.0–93.9 E 73 125.8–138.3 E 78 94.0–103.1 E 74 138.4–150.1 E 79 150.2–166.6 E 80 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 109 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Application and General Information Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Selection Tables Size 4 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 100–111.9 E 88 164–173.9 E 96 112–121.9 E 89 174–185.9 E 97 122–131.9 E 91 186–195.9 E 98 132–139.9 E 92 196–215.9 E 99 140–151.9 E 93 216–227.9 E 101 152–163.9 E 94 228–251.9 E 102 Size 5 Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number Motor Full–Load Current (A) Thermal Unit Number 210–233 AR 3.28 332–369 AR 4.8 234–265 AR 3.62 370–415 AR 5.3 266–297 AR 3.98 416–459 AR 5.8 298–331 AR 4.37 460–532 AR 6.4 110 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Short Circuit Current Ratings Technical Overview SECTION 3—TECHNICAL OVERVIEW Short Circuit Current Ratings Motor control centers are being applied to electrical systems with increasingly high available fault currents. Because of ever increasing short circuit requirements, Schneider Electric continually pursues higher ratings through new design and testing. Many “buzz” words and terms are used to describe short circuit ratings and how they relate to motor control centers. Here are a few with a description of what they actually mean: Interrupt Rating This term describes the maximum fault current level that a particular device can interrupt. This type of rating applies only to devices that operate to interrupt a short circuit when it occurs. This term does not apply to power bus or components of the electrical system that do not interrupt current. Different units within the same motor control center may have different interrupt ratings. Further, the interrupt rating does not take into consideration the effect of a main device or the bus withstand rating. Bus Bracing or Withstand Rating This term describes the capacity of the bus network to withstand the mechanical forces generated during a short circuit (fault). Integrated Equipment Rating This term is not clearly defined, especially when applied to motor control centers. While it is often assumed that this term means series connected short circuit ratings or short circuit current ratings, this term can also have other interpretations. Integrated equipment ratings are generally not provided for motor control centers. Series Connected Short Circuit Current Ratings This term describes short circuit ratings that take into consideration the effect of a main overcurrent protective device located in the motor control center or in upstream equipment. It does not necessarily mean that the main has to open whenever a fault occurs. Many engineers feel that series connected short circuit ratings mean that a system cannot be “coordinated” (coordination refers to a system’s capability of interrupting a fault at the lowest level thereby limiting the amount of equipment shut down as a result of that fault). System coordination should be considered when designing any electrical distribution system and the level of coordination will often dictate the type of equipment used. It is possible to maintain acceptable levels of system coordination while utilizing series short circuit ratings and alternately, avoidance of series connected short circuit ratings will not automatically mean that the system will be fully coordinated. Fault coordination should not be confused with series connected short circuit current ratings. Short Circuit Current Rating This term is Schneider Electric’s “bottom line” in describing the overall short circuit rating of a motor control center. It means that the motor control center will withstand and/or interrupt a fault on an electrical system capable of supplying the specified fault current. To be properly applied, a motor control center must have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the specified available fault current. In order to obtain this rating, a motor control center must contain: 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 111 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Technical Overview Short Circuit Current Ratings 1. A main device capable of interrupting the specified fault current, located in the motor control center or in upstream equipment. A short circuit current rating of a motor control center cannot be greater than the interrupt rating of the main device feeding it. or: 2. A bus bracing or withstand rating equal to or greater than the specified fault current. and: 3. Units with short circuit current ratings equal to or greater than the specified fault current. All units must either have an interrupt rating greater than or equal to the specified fault current or carry a series connected short circuit rating greater than or equal to this level. UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) has defined test criteria for motor control center short circuit ratings. In general, UL witnesses the testing of “worst case” configurations of motor control center units, structures, and bussing at the short circuit current levels for which the equipment is being rated. In many cases, such as units with circuit breaker disconnects, the same unit must be subjected to those fault levels more than once. To pass, equipment must withstand and/or interrupt the fault in accordance with UL criteria. UL Listed short circuit ratings ensure that different manufacturers are “comparing apples to apples” when describing short circuit current ratings. “Self-Certified” Short Circuit Current Ratings Short circuit current ratings that are obtained through first-party testing and/or engineering evaluation, are certified by the manufacturer, and are not UL Listed are known as “Self-Certified” ratings. Self-certified short circuit ratings should not necessarily be considered unacceptable. However, caution should be used because the basis for the short circuit ratings may differ from one manufacturer to another. 112 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Short Circuit Current Ratings Technical Overview Circuit Breaker Main and Branch Feeder–UL and CSA Short Circuit Ratings–Model 6 Motor Control Centers Circuit Breaker Frame Max. Rating Amps GJL 100 Short Circuit Rating 240 V 480 V 600 V 65 kA 65 kA — FA 100 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA FH 100 65 kA 25 kA 22 kA FC 100 100 kA 65 kA — KA 250 42 kA 25 kA 22 kA KH 250 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA KC 250 100 kA 65 kA — KI 250 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA LA 400 42 kA 30 kA 22 kA LH 400 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA LC 600 100 kA 65 kA 50 kA LE 600 100 kA 65 kA 50 kA LI 600 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA LX 600 100 kA 65 kA 50 kA LXI 600 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA MA 1000 42 kA 30 kA 22 kA MH 1000 65 kA 65 kA ➀ 25 kA ME 1000 65 kA 65 kA ➀ 25 kA MX 1000 65 kA 65 kA ➀ 25 kA PA 2000 65 kA 50 kA 42 kA PH 2000 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA PE 2000 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA PX 2000 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA ➀ Denotes rating with bus connection to Horizontal Power Bus. Otherwise rating is 50 kA. Fusible Switch Main and Branch Feeder–UL and CSA Short Circuit Ratings–Model 6 Motor Control Center Ratings for all voltages through 600 V. Max. Fuse Size 11/03 Short Circuit Rating Class H Class J Class R Class L 30 5 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 60 5 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 100 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 200 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 400 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 600 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA — 2000 — — — 100 kA © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 113 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Technical Overview Short Circuit Current Ratings Circuit Breaker Combination Starter with Melting Alloy or Bimetallic Thermal Overloads–UL and CSA Short Circuit Ratings–Model 6 Motor Control Centers NEMA Size 1, 2, and 3 Breaker Type Short Circuit Rating 240 V 480 V FA 22 kA 22 kA 22 kA FH 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA ➀ 100 kA FH/CLM ➁ 600 V 100 kA 100 kA KA 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ KH 100 kA 100 kA 65 kA ➀ KC 100 kA 100 kA — 4 KI 5 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KA/CLM ➁ 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KH/CLM ➁ 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KA 42 kA 25 kA 22 kA KH 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA KC 65 kA 65 kA — KI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LA 100 kA 100 kA ➂ 50 kA ➀ LH 100 kA 100 kA ➃ 50 kA ➄ LC 65 kA 65 kA 50 kA LE 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA LI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LX 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA LXI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LA 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ LH 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ LC 65 kA 65 kA 35 kA LE 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA LI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LX 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA 6 ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ LXI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA MA 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ MH 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 22 kA. CLM=Current Limiting Module Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 30 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 35 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 25 kA. 114 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Short Circuit Current Ratings Technical Overview Circuit Breaker Combination Starter with Solid State Overload–UL and CSA Short Circuit Ratings–Model 6 Motor Control Centers NEMA Size 1, 2, and 3 Breaker Type Short Circuit Rating 240 V 480 V FA 22 kA ➀ 22 kA ➀ 600 V FH 100 kA 100 kA ➃ FH/CLM ➅ 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KA 100 kA 100 kA ➃ 65 kA ➂ KH 100 kA 100 kA ➄ 65 kA ➃ KC 65 kA 65 kA — 22 kA ➁ 65 kA ➀ 4 5 KI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KA/CLM ➅ 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KH/CLM ➅ 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA KA ➀ 42 kA 25 kA 22 kA KH ➀ 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA KC 65 kA 65 kA — KI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LA 100 kA 100 kA ➁ 50 kA ➀ LH 100 kA 100 kA ➂ 50 kA ➃ LC 65 kA 65 kA 50 kA LE 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA LI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LX 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA LXI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LA 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ LH 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ LC 100 kA 65 kA 35 kA LE 65 kA 100 kA 50 kA LI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LX 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA 6 ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ 11/03 LXI 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA MA 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ MH 100 kA 100 kA 50 kA ➀ Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 18 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 14 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 22 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 25 kA. Denotes Thermal-Magnetic rating; Magnetic only rating is 35 kA. CLM=Current Limiting Module © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 115 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Technical Overview Short Circuit Current Ratings Fusible Switch Combination Starter Units (NEMA/EEMAC) with Melting Alloy, Bimetallic Thermal, or Solid State Overloads–UL and CSA Short Circuit Ratings–Model 6 Motor Control Centers Ratings for all voltages through 600 V. NEMA Size Short Circuit Rating Class H Class J Class R 1 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA 2 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA 3 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA 4 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA 5 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA 6 10 kA 100 kA 100 kA Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Compac 6 Application Rated Combination Starter Units and Bimetallic Thermal Overloads Only use GJL Magnetic Only or Thermal-Mag breakers and Class J fuses Disconnect 480 V Maximum 600 V Maximum Circuit Breaker 100 kA NA Fusible Switch 100 kA 100 kA 116 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Layout Instructions Selection Guide SECTION 4—SELECTION GUIDE Layout Instructions The lines between letters represent 3 in. increments. When planning your MCC line-up, use this form. Start at the top of the leftmost column, drawing a line across the column at the increment mark where the unit stops, e.g., a Compac 6, 6 in. unit would take up spaces A and B. A line would be drawn across the column from B and that unit designation would be “A.” The next unit designation would be “C,” and so on.) MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ MCC Section ____ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Example: MCC 1 Section ____ A B C D E F G H I J K L M A Sec A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X 6" (COMPAC 6) C 6" (COMPAC 6) E 12" (Standard Unit) I 12" (Standard Unit) Indicate shipping splits here by filling in the appropriate triangle (s) (three sections maximum). 11/03 ▼ Use page 118 to detail which components you’ll need to build your MCC. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 117 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Selection Guide Unit Designation Chart for Planning Unit Designation Chart for Planning Other Nameplate Identifications Push-to-Test Amber (Rev, Slow) Red (Run, Fwd, Fast) Indicating Lights Green (Stopped) Fast-Off-Slow Fwd-Off-Rev On-Off Hand-Off-Auto Fast-Slow-Stop HP Rating Start-Stop Size CB Trip/ Fuse Clips (A) NC Starter Class or Description NO Section/ Unit Location Control Devices Selector Switches Push Button Fwd-Rev-Stop Aux. Intlks. 118 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Introduction Wiring Diagrams SECTION 5—WIRING DIAGRAMS Introduction This section contains typical, elementary wiring diagrams for Model 6 motor control center starter units. These diagrams have been divided into three categories to allow selection of specific control. The three sections are: Power Circuit: The power circuit is typically 480 Vac, but is available in 208 Vac, 240 Vac, and 600 Vac. The circuit provides power to the motor load. Control Power Options: The power provided to the various means of control is listed with a fused control power transformer or listed as a separate source, i.e. the control power is provided by the customer. The standard control power system is 120 Vac, but others can be supplied. Control Options: Control options such as remote control, hand-off-auto, on-off pilot lights, start-stop push buttons, auxiliary interlocks, and others, are included. Customer connection points are designated by “FTB” (field terminal block). Submittal Drawing Cover Sheet The below is a Submittal Drawing Cover Sheet, which is to be used for bid packages and quotations. Fill it out and include it with the submittal drawings. NOTE: The elementary wiring diagrams contained in this catalog are for selection, bid packages, and quotations, and are not intended for construction. Wiring diagrams for construction will be provided with equipment orders. ✁ (Photocopy this page and cut along this dotted line.) Submittal Drawing Cover Sheet Schneider Electric Factory Order Number: Customer: Account Number: Customer Order Number: Architect: Engineer: Contractor: Model 6 Motor Control Center: ❏ Industrial (Check one) ❏ Commercial Applied Power: Size: Schneider Electric Field Sales Representative: Schneider Electric Field Sales Office: Processed By: Number of Copies for Record: Revision: Date: 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 119 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1-4 Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer M Y.46.ED.NPW ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM RWIRE.01 Y.46.E D.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 2 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 Y. 46.E D.NS1-5FVNR.01 Y.46.ED.NREMPWRWIRE.01 L1 T1 L2 T2 Y. 46.ED.NMOTOR.01 Motor Y.46.E D.CONDOT.0 1 4 5 1 6 3 L3 T3 OL FU 4 2 H1 H2 Trans X2 X1 M Control Options Y.46.ED.NCTRLTB.01 a Ground C b OL Y. 46.E D.NS15FVNR. 03 c d Auxiliary Interlocks Remote Control FTB a Remote Control FTB b FTB FTB M M FTB FTB FTB M Hand-OFF-Auto Selector Switch H O A b a FTB FTB Operating Mechanism Interlock Start-Stop Pushbuttons Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM 1 To Source Start Stop b a 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 5 2 4 6 M Green "OFF" Pilot Light Red "ON" Pilot Light 1 LS M c Off G d M c On R d 2 120 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams Full Voltage Non-Reversing, Size 1–4 with Separate Source M Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM Y. 4. 6ED.NS1-5FVNR.01 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 5 Y.46.ED.NREMPWRWIRE.01 2 L1 T1 4 L2 T2 6 L3 FTB X1 LS Control Options a OL FTB X2 b M C Auxiliary Interlocks Remote Control 1 FTB b 3 2 T3 d Remote Control a Motor M OL c FTB Y.46 .E DN .MOTOR.01 FTB FTB M M FTB FTB FTB M Hand-OFF-Auto Selector Switch H O A a b FTB FTB 1 2 Start-Stop Pushbuttons Start Stop a b M Green "OFF" Pilot Light M c 11/03 Red "ON" Pilot Light Off G d c M On R d © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 121 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1-4 Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer F Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.NREMPWRWIRE.0 1 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 5 2 L1 4 L2 6 1 3 L3 Trans X1 OL L4 L1 H4 H1 L2 L5 L3 X2 1 T3 L6 R 4 2 Motor T2 L5 FU Y. 46.E D. NMOT OR .1 0 T1 L4 L6 FU 2 Ground Control Options a b Auxiliary Interlocks Remote Control F a Remote Stop Remote Reverse b FTB 2 Remote Forward FTB R F FTB 1 F F F FTB FTB FTB FTB R R FTB FTB R FTB 5 FTB 4 FTB OL C 3 FTB C R Hand-OFF-Auto Selector Switch with Stop Pushbutton and Forward/Reverse Pushbuttons Pilot Lights: Green "OFF;" Red "Forward;" Red "Reverse" FTB 2 F SS Stop H O A Reverse b Forward R F OL C F R Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.0 ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM 1 C Forward R FTB 1 Operating Mechanism Interlock To Source a 1 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 5 R 2 4 6 Reverse R F R FTB 3 Off G X1 X2 1 LS 2 122 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer (cont.) (Refer to the power circuit diagram on page 122.) Hand-OFF-Auto Selector Switch With Stop Pushbutton and Forward/Reverse Selector Switch FTB 2 Selector Switch a Stop b H O A F R R F OL C R F C FTB 3 FTB 1 Forward/Reverse/Stop Pushbuttons F a Stop b Forward Reverse R OL F C F R C R Forward/Reverse/Stop Pushbuttons Red "Forward," Red "Reverse," and Green "Off" F b a Stop Reverse Forward R F OL C R F C Forward R R Reverse R F R Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 123 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1-4 Full Voltage Reversing, Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer (cont.) (Refer to the power circuit diagram on page 122.) Remote Forward/Reverse/Stop Pushbutton With Red "Forward," Red "Reverse," and Green "Off" F a b FTB 2 Remote Stop Remote Reverse Remote Forward R FTB FTB F OL C 3 1 BFS F FTB R C Forward 5 FTB 4 R R Reverse R F R O FF G 124 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1 -4BKR-01.SYM Y.46.E D.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 ED-NS2-42S2WHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 2 L1 4 L2 Y.46.ED.MSMOTOR.0 1 T6 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 T4 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 5 6 T5 L L3 H T2 L2 120 Vac Separate Source X1 Motor H T1 L1 T3 L3 X2 1 LS L 2 FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 L C ED-NS12S2WLO-06.SYM H Y.46 .ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y. 46.E D.CONDOT.01 5 OL L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 FTB 2 ED-S3-4HCLO-02.SYM H ED-NS12S2WHI-06.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 C L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-2SPEED-OLS-4-01.SYM OL H ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 125 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1 -4BKR-01.SYM Y.46.E D.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 ED-NS2-42S2WHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 2 L1 4 L2 Y.46.ED.MSMOTOR.0 1 L T6 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 L T4 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 5 6 T5 L L3 T1 L1 T2 L2 120 Vac Separate Source X1 Motor T3 L3 X2 1 LS L 2 FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 L C ED-NS12S2WLO-06.SYM H Y.46 .ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y. 46.E D.CONDOT.01 5 OL L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 FTB 2 ED-S3-4HCLO-02.SYM H ED-NS12S2WHI-06.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 C L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-2SPEED-OLS-4-01.SYM OL H ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM 126 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.ED.MSMO TOR.0 1 L1 T6 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 4 L2 T4 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 1 3 L1 FU 2 T5 L2 4 H1 H2 X1 X2 L3 H T1 H T2 Motor T3 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M FU Ground L High Stop Low H ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SY M H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 OL H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-S3-4HCLO-02 .SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 OL H High ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM R Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Low R H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 11/03 FTB FTB L L FTB FTB © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 127 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BKR-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.ED.MSMO TOR.0 1 L1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 L T6 L T4 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 4 L2 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 1 3 L1 FU 2 T5 L2 4 H1 H2 X1 X2 Motor T1 T2 L3 T3 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M FU Ground L High Stop Low H ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SY M H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 OL H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-S3-4HCLO-02 .SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 OL H High ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM R Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Low R H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FTB FTB L L FTB FTB 128 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant or Variable Torque, Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T6 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T4 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 T5 L1 L2 120 Vac Separate Source LS 1 FTB 2 L3 H T1 H T2 Motor T3 FTB X2 X1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M FU L FTB High Stop 4 Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 5 OL H L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-S3-4HCLO -02.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 3 FTB 2 OL H Low ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM R Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 High R H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 11/03 FTB FTB L L FTB FTB © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 129 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 1-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 1-Winding, Constant Horsepower, Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 L T6 L T4 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 T5 L1 T1 L2 120 Vac Separate Source LS 1 FTB 2 Motor T2 L3 T3 FTB X2 X1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M FU L FTB High Stop 4 Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 5 OL H L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 ED-S3-4HCLO -02.SYM Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 3 FTB 2 OL H Low ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM R Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 High R H L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FTB FTB L L FTB FTB 130 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with 120 Vac Control Power Transformer and Remote Control H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 1 3 L1 FU 2 T13 L2 4 H1 H2 X1 X2 Motor T1 T2 L3 T3 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M Ground FU L FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM 1 H L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 5 OL L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 FTB 2 ED-S3-4HCLO -02.SYM L H C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-NS12S2WHI-06.SY M ED -S 2E PED-O LS-4-01.SYM OL H ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 131 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 1 3 L1 FU 2 T13 L2 4 H1 H2 X1 X2 Motor T1 T2 L3 T3 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M1 FU Ground L Stop High Low H Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 H L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 OL L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 L H C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Low H OL R ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM High R L H Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FTB FTB FTB FTB L L H H FTB FTB FTB FTB 132 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Control Power Transformer, Remote Control, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 1 3 L1 FU 2 T13 L2 4 H1 H2 X1 X2 Motor T1 T1 L3 T1 TRANS Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M1 FU Ground L FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 1 H L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 5 OL L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 L H C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 FTB OL High 2 H R ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM Low R Off L H G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 11/03 FTB FTB FTB FTB L L H H FTB FTB FTB FTB © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 133 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source and Remote Control BKR H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 1 To Source 3 2 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L3 T13 L L1 L2 120 Vac Separate Source FTB Motor T1 T2 L3 T3 FTB X1 X2 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-GRD1H-01.SY M LS L FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB ED-PBHI-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 ED-PBLO-01.SYM 1 H L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 5 OL L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 FTB 2 ED-S3-4HCLO -02.SYM H C L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 ED-NS12S2WHI-06.SY M ED -S 2E PED-O LS-4-01.SYM OL H ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM 134 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary and Operator Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 1 To Source 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 2 Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 T13 L1 L2 120 Vac Separate Source FTB Motor T1 T1 L3 T1 FTB X1 X2 L LS Stop High Low H Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 L L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 OL L Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 H H C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 OL Low H R High ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM R L H Off G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 11/03 FTB FTB FTB FTB L L H H FTB FTB FTB FTB © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 135 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams 2-Speed, 2-Winding Size 1-4 2-Speed, 2-Winding (Separate Winding), Size 1–4 with Separate Source, Remote Control, Red “High,” Red “Low,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Auxiliary and Operator Interlocks H Y.46.ED.NPWRWIRE.01 ED-NS1-4BK R-01.SY M Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 1 To Source 3 2 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Y. 46.E D.MSMO TOR.01 L1 T11 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 4 L2 T12 ED-NS2-42S2WLO-01.SY Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 M 5 6 L L3 T13 L1 L2 120 Vac Separate Source FTB Motor T1 T1 L3 T1 FTB X2 X1 L LS FTB Remote Stop 4 Remote High Remote Low FTB H FTB Y.46.ED.CON DOT.0 1 1 L L C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 5 OL H L FTB Y.46.ED.CONDOT.01 H C Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 Y.46.ED.CONDOT.0 1 3 Low FTB 2 H OL R ED-S3-4HCHI-01.SYM High R Off L H G Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FTB FTB FTB FTB L L H H FTB FTB FTB FTB 136 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3-4 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer and Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons R 3 A65 A50 A0 A100 A80 T1 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 5 1S R 2 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 To Source 2S Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect C100 C80 1 1S 2S R 1S OL T3 FU TR TR 1S R C TR R 1S C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H1 H2 X1 X2 TRANS 1 2 1 Ground FU FTB Remote Remote Start FTB Stop TR OLs C 1 RTB 3 TR 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 137 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3-4 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On” and Green “Off” Pilot Lights 2S 5 T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect C100 C80 To Source 1 A65 A50 A0 1S A100 A80 2S R R BKR OL T3 FU TR 1S TR R C TR R 1S C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H1 H2 X1 TRANS X2 Ground 1 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FU 2 Stop Start TR C TR RTB RTB R R RTB RTB OL On R TR Off G 138 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3-4 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, and Red “On” and Green “Off” Pilot Lights R 2S 2S 5 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S C65 C50 C0 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect C100 C80 To Source 1 A65 A50 A0 1S A100 A80 R 1S OL T3 1 FU 2 4 1 1S TR TR R C 2 TR R 1S C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H2 TRANS X2 H1 X1 Ground 1 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) FU SS 2 H O FTB A R C FTB 1 Remote Control FTB R TR FTB R FTB FTB 2 On R TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 139 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3-4 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3–4 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights R R 2 A65 A50 A0 A100 A80 T1 2S 4 5 1S R Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 3 2S Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 1S C100 C80 To Source 1 2S 1S T3 FU TR TR 1S R C 1S TR R C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 120 Vac Separate Source LS RTB 1 2 X1 RTB Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) X2 1 FU 2 Stop Start TR C TR RTB RTB R R RTB RTB R On R TR Off G 140 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3-4 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 3—4 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay R 2S 1S 5 A65 A50 A0 2S 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect C100 C80 To Source 1 A100 A80 R 1S T3 FU TR 1S TR R C 1S TR R C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 120 Vac Separate Source LS RTB 1 RTB X1 2 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) X2 1 FU 2 H O RTB R R RTB RTB R TR A RTB C FTB FTB 1 2 TR On R TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 141 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer and Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons R L2 L3 3 A65 A50 A0 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 5 A100 A80 2S Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 To Source 1 C100 C80 L1 1S 2S R 1S OL T3 FU TR TR 1S R C TR R 1S C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H1 H2 X1 X2 TRANS 1 2 1 Ground FU FTB Remote Remote Start FTB Stop TR OLs C 1 3 FTB 2 TR 142 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights R 2S 1S 5 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 L3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect C100 C80 To Source L2 1 A65 A50 A0 2S L1 A100 A80 R 1S T3 OL FU 1S TR TR R X C 1S X TR R C * * Late Break 1S 2S X C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H1 X1 H2 TRANS X2 Ground 1 2 FU Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) Stop Start TR OLs RTB RTB R R RTB RTB C TR On R TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 143 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights R 1S 2S 2S L2 L3 3 5 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 To Source 1 C100 C80 L1 A65 A50 A0 A100 A80 R 1S OL T3 FU TR TR 1S R C 1S TR R C * 1S 2S * Late Break C 2S 1 3 2 4 FU H1 X1 H2 TRANS X2 Ground 1 2 FU H O TR A C 2 RTB RTB R R RTB RTB OLs Remote Control 1 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) TR On R TR Off G 144 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights R R L3 3 2 A65 A50 A0 A100 A80 T1 2S 4 5 1S R Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 2S Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 1S C100 C80 L1 2S 1S T3 FU TR TR 1S R C 1S TR R C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 120 Vac Separate Source LS RTB 1 2 X1 RTB Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) X2 1 FU 2 Stop Start TR C TR RTB RTB R R RTB RTB R On R TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 145 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 5 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay R 2S 1S L3 3 5 2S A65 A50 A0 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 1S T1 R 2 2S 4 Motor T2 R 6 2S 1 3 2 4 C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 C100 C80 L1 A100 A80 R 1S T3 FU TR 1S TR R C 1S TR R C * * Late Break 1S 2S C 2S 120 Vac Separate Source LS RTB RTB 1 X1 2 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) X2 1 FU 2 H O C Remote Control FTB FTB 1 2 TR RTB R R RTB RTB R TR A RTB On R TR Off G 146 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Remote Start/Stop Push Buttons, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay 2S R 1S 1CT L3 1S T1 2CT R 2 2S 4 5 A65 A50 A0 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect T2 Motor 3CT R 6 2S C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 C100 C80 L1 2S A100 A80 R 1S T3 30L 20L 1 3 2 4 FU 10L 1TR 1TR 1S 1S C 5 6 2TR 1S C 2S 2TR C R 2S 1S 1TR H H4 X X2 1 3 2 4 TRANS FU R A 1 3 2 4 H B FU TRANS X1 1 C X2 1 FU Ground 2 FTB Remote Remote Stop Start FTB 1TR OL C 3 1 RTB 2 1TR 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 147 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay 2S R 1S R L2 L3 T1 R 2 2C 2S 4 5 A65 A50 A0 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 1S T2 R 6 Motor 3C 2S C65 C50 C0 To Source 1 C100 C80 L1 A100 A80 1C 2S 1S T3 30 20 1 FU 2 10 4 1 TR TR 1S 1S C 2TR 1S C 2TR 2S C R 1S 2S 1TR H1 H4 X1 X2 TRANS 3 1 FU 2 R 4 C 1 3 2 4 FU H1 H2 TRANS X1 X2 Ground 1 2 FU Start Stop 2 1 RTB RTB R R RTB RTB OL TR C 1 Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 2 On TR R 1 TR 2 Off G 148 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Control Power Transformer, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay 1S 2S R 1CT L3 3 R 2 1S T1 2CT 2S 4 5 A65 A50 A0 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect T2 Motor 3CT R 6 2S C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 C100 C80 L1 2S A100 A80 R 1S T3 30L 20L 1 3 2 4 FU 10L 1TR 1S TR 1S C 1S 2TR C 2TR 2S C R 1S 2S 1TR H1 H4 X1 X2 1 TRANS 3 FU R 2 A 1 3 2 4 C 4 B FU H1 H2 X1 X2 TRANS Ground 1 2 FU H O 1TR A FTB 1 2 RTB RTB R R RTB RTB C Remote Control FTB R Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) On 1TR R 1TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 149 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Separate Source, Start/Stop Push Buttons, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay 1S 2S R 1CT L3 3 1S T1 2CT R 2 2S 4 5 A65 A50 A0 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect 3CT R 6 Motor T2 2S C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 C100 C80 L1 2S A100 A80 R 1S T3 30L 20L 1 3 2 4 10L FU 1S 1TR R 1TR C 2TR 1S C 2TR 2S C R 1S 2S 1TR H1 H4 X1 1 X2 TRANS 3 FU 2 120 Vac Separate Source A RTB 1 2 FU Stop Start 1TR C 1TR B Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) 1 2 C RTB X2 X1 4 R RTB RTB R R RTB RTB OL On R 1TR Off G 150 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 with Separate Source, Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch, Red “On,” Green “Off” Pilot Lights, and Melting Alloy Overload Relay 1S 2S R 1CT 2S L3 3 Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Disconnect T1 2CT 2S 4 5 1S R 2 T2 Motor 3CT R 6 2S C65 C50 C0 To Source L2 1 C100 C80 L1 A65 A50 A0 A100 A80 R 1S T3 30L 20L 1 3 2 4 10L FU 1TR R 1S 1TR C 2TR 1S C 2TR 2S C R 1S 2S 1T H1 H4 X1 X2 1 3 TRANS FU 120 Vac Separate Source 2 C RTB 1 2 X1 RTB X2 1 2 FU H O 1TR A R C Remote Control FTB FTB 1 On 1TR 2 4 R B Auxiliary Interlocks (when required) RTB RTB R R RTB RTB R 1TR Off G 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 151 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Wiring Diagrams Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer, Size 6 152 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers General Dimensions SECTION 6—DIMENSIONS General Standard sections contain both a vertical bus system and a vertical wireway. A relay section contains neither, but does have horizontal power and ground bus for splicing to other sections. A relay section can be equipped with a relay pan for customer-mounted equipment and devices. Starter units and main or branch devices that require 72 inches of space are mounted in a relay section. A transition section is used to splice two different models of Square D MCCs together (see page 17), turn a corner, or create a back-to-back arrangement (see page 16). Conduit entry is not recommended in transition sections. NOTE: All cross-hatched areas in this section represent conduit entry. Numbers in circles indicate vertical clearance in inches to nearest obstruction. Quick Finder for Conduit Entry Drawings Section Dimensions Description Page Bottom View Top View Standard Sections 155 162 Relay Sections 156 162 Standard Sections with 9 in. Wireway 155 162 20 in. W x 15 in. D 25 in. W x 15 in. D 30 in. W x 15 in. D Relay Sections 156 162 Relay Sections 157 163 Standard Sections 157 163 Relay Sections: Includes Size 4 Autotransformer 159 164 Standard Sections with 9 in. Wireway 158 163 Relay Sections: Includes 800 A–1200 A Mains/Branches Size 5 Autotransformer 160 164 30 in. W x 20 in. D Relay Sections: Includes 1600 A–2000 A Mains/Branches Size 6 Autotransformer 160 164 50 in. W x 20 in. D Relay Sections: Includes Size 6 Autotransformer with Fusible Switch Disconnects 161 164 20 in. W x 20 in. D 25 in. W x 20 in. D 20 in./25 in./30 in. W x 15 in./20 in. D Additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R Conduit Entry Information 11/03 161 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 153 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions NEMA/EEMAC Enclosures NEMA/EEMAC 1, NEMA/EEMAC 1 Gasketed, or NEMA/EEMAC 12 Enclosures Number of Sections Per Shipping Dimension “X” Assembly 1 1.90 2 5.00 3 10.00 1.56 X 90.00 3.90 3.00 X 3.00 1.56 X 12.00 4.00 9.00 90.00 72" Unit Mounting Space 15" D Right Side View 6.00 20.00 1.50 20-in-wide Section with Standard Vertical Wireway 9.10 X 12.00 72" Unit Mounting Space 9.10 8.90 20" D Right Side View 6.00 25.00 1.50 25-in-wide Section with Optional Vertical Wireway 3.38 3.38 3.38 15.00 3.38 20.00 Notes: All dimensions are shown in inches. Depths shown indicate actual depth of the structure. Doors and cover plates extend forward 0.06 inches. Handles and door mounted devices extend forward 2.45 inches or less. Standard door swing extends forward 15.38 inches for unit doors. On full-section units, 20, 25, or 30 inches is required for doors. 154 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers NEMA/EEMAC Enclosures Dimensions NEMA/EEMAC 3R Non-Walk-In Basic Enclosures Removable lifting angle Front view 92.9 27.2 32.2 11.5 16.5 15" Deep section 20" Deep section Side view Side view 26.6 31.6 94.7 Individual ex rior door pro vertical section 26, 31, 36, or 41 6" Standard Section Width 20", 25", or 30" Standard Section Width 20", 25", or 30" Standard Section Width 20", 25", or 30" 0.3 Standard section depth 15" or 20" Floor Plan Front 11.3 Combined width of sections, plus 6.0" per shipping split 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 155 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Standard Sections-15 in. Deep Standard Sections—15 in. Deep 8.24 78 7 15.00 90 8.24 15.00 2.38 3.38 90 2.38 3.38 3.26 3.26 1.39 17.22 1.39 17.22 20.00 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 78 6.86 90 78 6.86 7 15.00 1.69 11 15.00 4.07 90 1.69 4.07 3.26 3.26 17.22 17.22 2.27 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 78 8.24 7 15.00 2.27 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 8.24 78 12 90 2.38 78 22 15.00 90 2.38 3.38 3.38 8.26 22.22 8.26 22.22 1.39 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 1.39 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment and 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View * See page 162 for additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R information. 156 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Standard Sections-15 in. Deep Dimensions 78 6.86 15.00 78 6.86 7 1.69 90 4.07 22 15.00 1.69 90 4.07 7.38 7.38 20.46 20.46 2.27 2.27 25.00 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment and 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Relay Sections—15 in. Deep 8.24 78 15.00 6.86 90 78 90 15.00 2.38 3.38 1.69 4.07 3.26 2.38 1.39 17.22 2.27 15.46 20.00 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 15" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 12*, Bottom View 8.24 6.86 78 15.00 90 2.38 3.38 78 90 15.00 1.69 4.07 8.26 22.22 7.38 1.39 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 20.46 2.27 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 12*, Bottom View * See page 162 for additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R information. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 157 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Standard Sections - 20 in. Deep 6.86 78 8.24 90 15.00 2.38 3.38 78 1.69 90 15.00 4.07 7.38 8.26 27.22 2.27 25.46 1.39 30.00 30.00 15" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 15" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Standard Sections — 20 in. Deep 5 13.24 Ground Bus 5 13.24 78 20.00 12.85 Ground Bus 78 20.00 12.85 12 7 90 2.38 90 3.38 2.38 3.38 3.26 3.26 17.22 17.22 1.39 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 5 20.00 1.39 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View Ground Bus 13.24 20.00 7.9 12.85 * See page 162 for additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R information. 3.38 17.22 1.39 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with 3-Phase Distribution Transformer NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 158 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Standard Sections - 20 in. Deep Dimensions Ground Bus 5 5 11.86 Ground Bus 11.86 78 20.00 78 20.00 12.85 7 12.85 7 1.69 90 1.69 90 4.07 4.07 2.38 2.38 15.46 15.46 2.27 2.27 20.00 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Ground Bus 5 11.86 20.00 12.85 7.9 4.07 15.46 2.27 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with 3-Phase Distribution Transformer NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 5 Ground Bus 5 13.24 13.24 78 20.00 Ground Bus 12.85 7 90 78 20.00 12.85 22 2.38 3.38 90 2.38 3.38 8.26 22.22 8.26 1.39 25.00 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 22.22 1.39 25.00 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View * See page 162 for additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R information. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 159 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Relay Sections-20 in. Deep 5 Ground Bus 5 11.86 Ground Bus 11.86 20.00 78 7 90 12.85 20.00 78 22 1.69 4.07 90 12.85 1.69 4.07 7.38 7.38 20.46 20.46 1.39 25.00 25.00 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Bottom Main Lug Compartment NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Relay Sections—20 in. Deep 5 1.39 Ground Bus 13.24 13.24 20.00 12.85 8 20.00 78 5.86 90 3.38 3.38 11.41 3.26 17.22 17.22 1.39 20.00 5 20" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 4 Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R, Bottom View Ground Bus 11.86 11.86 78 12.85 8 20.00 5.86 90 25 2.38 4.07 4.07 11.41 2.38 15.46 * See page 162 for additional NEMA/ EEMAC 3R information. 2.90 1.39 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R, Bottom View 20.00 25 2.38 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 2.27 15.46 2.02 2.27 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 4 Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 160 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Main/Branch Devices and Relay Sections-20 in. Deep Dimensions Main/Branch Devices and Relay Sections—20 in. Deep ➀ When the section contains a main, branch breaker, and a switch, Ground Bus 5 the vertical clearance becomes approximately 30 inches. 20.00 8 13.24 13.24 12.85 30 20.00 5.86 26 2.38 90 3.38 3.38 11.41 8.26 22.22 5.40 1.39 22.22 1.39 25.00 25.00 800–1200 A Main, Branch, or 20" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 20" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 5 Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View Ground Bus 5 20.00 8 11.86 11.86 20.00 12.85 30 5.79 26 1.69 90 4.07 4.07 11.41 7.38 20.46 25.00 25.00 20" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 5 Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 800–1200 A Main, Branch, or 20" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 5 4.52 2.27 20.46 2.27 Ground Bus 13.24 20.00 26 12.85 30 90 3.38 8.26 11/03 20.00 2.38 3.38 * See page 162 for additional NEMA/EEMAC 3R information. 13.24 27.22 30.00 1600–2000 A Main, Branch, or 20" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View 5.37 1.39 1.48 30.00 20" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 6 C/B Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R*, Bottom View © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 161 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Relay Sections-20 in. Deep/50 in. Wide ➀ When the section contains a main, branch breaker, and a switch, the vertical clearance becomes approximately 30 inches. Ground Bus 5 11.86 20.00 26 12.85 30 11.86 20.00 1.69 90 4.07 4.07 7.38 3.81 2.27 25.46 2.28 30.00 30.00 20" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 6 C/B Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View 1600–2000 A Main, Branch, or 20" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Relay Sections—20 in. Deep/50 in. Wide 20.00 20.00 26 26 13.24 26 26 4.07 3.38 17.22 5.37 3.81 2.28 30.00 1.39 20.00 1.48 30.00 11.86 20" Deep/50" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 6 F/S Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 3R, Bottom View 15.45 2.27 20.00 20" Deep/50" Wide Relay Section with NEMA Size 6 F/S Autotransformer Starter NEMA/EEMAC 12, Bottom View Additional Conduit Entry Information for NEMA/EEMAC 3R Enclosures Floor plan conduit entry Standard section width 20", 25", or 30" Standard section width 20", 25", or 30" Standard section width 20", 25", or 30" Conduit entry area is the same as NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Conduit entry area is the same as NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Conduit entry area is the same as NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Front 0.3 Standard section depth 15" or 20" 11.3 Combined width of sections plus 6.0" per shipping split 6" 162 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Standard Sections-15 in. Deep Dimensions Standard Sections—15 in. Deep 11.76 11.76 15.00 15.00 12 90 12 4.14 3.26 1.62 90 4.14 3.26 17.22 1.62 1.39 17.22 1.39 20.00 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 15" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Top-Located Main ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 11.76 11.76 15.00 15.00 12 90 12 4.14 90 8.26 1.62 6.25 8.26 22.22 1.39 1.62 22.22 25.00 1.39 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 15" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Top-Located Main ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View Relay Sections—15 in. Deep 11.76 11.76 15.00 15.00 12 90 4.14 12 90 8.26 3.26 1.62 17.22 4.14 1.39 20.00 15" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 1.62 22.22 1.39 25.00 15" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View ➀ No 90-in vertical wireway area is available for 1200 A main lug compartment. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 163 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Standard Sections-20 in. Deep 11.76 15.00 12 4.14 90 8.26 1.62 27.22 1.39 30.00 15" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View Standard Sections—20 in. Deep 16.76 16.76 20.00 20.00 12 90 12 4.14 6.25 3.26 3.26 1.62 90 17.22 1.62 1.39 17.22 1.39 20.00 20.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 20" Deep/20" Wide Standard Section with Top-Located Main ➀ NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 16.76 11.76 20.00 20.00 12 90 4.14 12 90 8.26 8.26 1.62 22.22 1.39 1.62 22.22 1.39 25.00 25.00 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View 6.25 20" Deep/25" Wide Standard Section with Top-Located Main ➀ and 9" Vertical Wireway NEMA/EEMAC 1, 1A, 12, Top View ➀ When the section contains a main, branch breaker, and a switch, the vertical clearance becomes approximately 30 inches. 164 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Relay Sections-20 in. Deep Dimensions Relay Sections—20 in. Deep 16.76 16.76 20.00 20.00 12 90 12 4.14 90 3.26 1.62 6.25 8.26 17.22 1.62 1.39 22.22 20.00 1.39 25.00 20" Deep/20" Wide Relay Section ➀ Top View 20" Deep/25" Wide Relay Section ➀ Top View 16.76 20.00 12 90 4.14 8.26 1.62 27.22 1.39 30.00 20" Deep/30" Wide Relay Section ➀ Top View 16.76 20.00 12 90 12 8.26 1.62 90 4.14 3.26 27.22 17.22 30.00 20.00 1.39 20" Deep/50" Wide Relay Section with NEMA/EEMA Size 6 F/S Autotransformer Starter, Top View ➀ When the section contains a main, branch breaker, and a switch, the vertical clearance becomes approximately 30 inches. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 165 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Dimensions Relay Sections-20 in. Deep 166 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Regulatory Requirements Typical Specifications SECTION 7—TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS This section includes requirements for a motor control center and all required control devices as shown on the drawing and specified to be part of the MCC equipment. The power system feeding the MCC shall be 208 V, 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 60 Hz unless otherwise indicated. Regulatory Requirements The MCC must conform to Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 845, current revision, CSA, EEMAC, NEMA ICS 18-2001, the latest version of the National Electrical Code, and the Canadian Electrical Code. The MCC must be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility. Packing and Shipping The MCC shall be separated into shipping blocks of no more than three vertical sections each. Shipping blocks shall be shipped on their sides to permit easier handling at the job site. Each shipping block shall include a removable lifting angle, which will allow a convenient means of attaching an overhead crane or other suitable lifting equipment. Storage If the MCC must be placed into storage after its receipt, store it in a clean, dry, and ventilated building free from temperature extremes. Acceptable storage temperatures are from 0 °C (32 °F) to 40 °C (104 °F). Warranty The MCC shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment by the manufacturer. Materials A. Steel material shall comply with UL 845 and CSA requirements. B. Each MCC shall consist of one or more vertical sections of heavy gauge steel bolted together to form a rigid, free-standing assembly. A removable 7-gauge structural steel lifting angle shall be mounted full width of the MCC lineup at the top. Removable 10-gauge bottom channel sills shall be mounted underneath front and rear of the vertical sections extending the full width of the lineup. Vertical sections made of welded side-frame assembly formed from a minimum of 12-gauge steel. Internal reinforcement structural parts shall be of 12- and 14-gauge steel to provide a strong, rigid assembly. The entire assembly shall be constructed and packaged to withstand normal stresses incurred during transit and installation. Structures 11/03 A. Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead-front, free-standing assemblies. Structures shall be capable of being bolted together to form a single assembly. B. The overall height of the MCC shall not exceed 90 in (2286 mm) (not including base channel or lifting angle). Base channels, of 1.5 in (38 mm) in height, and a 3 in (76 mm) high lifting angle shall be removable. The total width of one section shall be 20 in (508 mm); [widths of 25 in (630 mm), 30 in (760 mm), 35 in (890 mm), 40 in (1016 mm) and 50 in (1260 mm) can be used for larger devices]. C. Structures shall be NEMA/EEMAC 1 (general purpose), 1A (gasketed general purpose), 12 (industrial duty), or 3R non-walk-in (rainproof). © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 167 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Standard Paint D. Each 20 in wide standard section shall have all the necessary hardware and bussing for modular plugon units to be added or relocated. All unused space shall be covered by hinged blank doors and equipped to accept future units. Vertical bus openings shall be covered by manual or automatic bus shutters. E. Each section shall include a top plate (single piece or two-piece). NEMA/EEMAC 12 shall also include a bottom plate. Top and bottom plates shall be removable to facilitate cutting conduit entry openings. Standard Paint All metal structural and unit parts shall be completely painted using an Electrodeposition process so that interior and exterior surfaces are covered with a complete finish coat on and between them. The basic process shall consist of an iron phosphate pretreatment for the improvement of paint adhesion and non-chrome sealer rinse to enhance corrosion resistance. The paint process shall consist of cleaning, rinses, phosphating, non-chrome sealer rinses, prepaint rinses, painting, post paint rinse, bake cure, and cool down. Paint shall be UL recognized acrylic Electrodeposition baked enamel ANSI 49 gray. All painted parts must be able to pass at least 300 hours of salt spray per ASTM b117 with less than 1/8 inch loss of paint from a scribed line. Special Paint (Customer-Specified) All customer-specified metal structural and unit parts shall be completely painted so that interior and exterior surfaces are covered with a complete cosmetic finish coat. The basic process shall consist of an Electrodeposition-coated primer coat followed by an electrostatic powder coating. Paint shall be Polyester-Polyurethane, with the color to be customer specified. All painted parts must be able to pass at least 300 hours of salt spray per ASTM b117 with less than 1/8 inch loss of paint from a scribed line. Wireways A. Structures shall contain a minimum 12 in (305 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top of each section and a minimum 6 in (152 mm) high horizontal wireway at the bottom of each section. These wireways shall be the full width of the MCC to allow room for power and control cable connections between units in different sections. B. A full-depth vertical wireway shall be provided in each MCC section accepting modular plug-on units. The vertical wireway shall connect the top and bottom horizontal wireway and shall be isolated from unit interiors by a full height barrier. The vertical wireway shall be 4 in (102 mm) wide minimum with a separate hinged door. There should be a minimum of 60 in2 (387 cm2) of cabling cross sectional space available for 15-inch-deep sections, and 80 in2 (516 cm2) for 20-inch-deep sections. Access to the wireways shall not require opening control unit doors. Structures that house a single, full section control unit are not required to have vertical wireways. Those control units must open directly into the MCC horizontal wireways. Barriers A. All power bussing and splice connections shall be isolated from the unit compartments and the wireways. The horizontal bus shall be supported by a glass filled polyester assembly that braces the bus against the forces generated during a short circuit. The horizontal bus shall be isolated from the top horizontal wireway by a two-piece non-conductive barrier. The barrier shall be of a sliding design to allow access to the bus and connections for maintenance. The barrier shall be removable. 168 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Bussing Typical Specifications B. The vertical bus shall be housed in a molded glass-filled polyester support that provides bus insulation and braces the bus against the forces generated during a short circuit. These supports shall have openings every 3 in. (76.2 mm) for unit stab-on connections. Each opening shall be provided with a manual shutter to close off the stab opening. These shutters shall be attached to the structure so that when they are removed (to allow a stab connection) they are retained in the structure and are readily accessible for use should a plug-on unit be removed from the MCC. C. Barriers shall be provided in the vertical structure and unit designs to prevent the contact of any energized bus or terminal by a fishtape inserted through the conduit or wireway areas. Bussing A. All bussing and connectors shall be tin-plated copper, silver-plated copper, or tin-plated aluminum. B. The main horizontal bus shall be rated 600 A, 800 A, 1200 A, 1600 A, 2000 A, or 2500 A continuous and shall extend the full width of the MCC. Bus ratings shall be based on 65 °C maximum temperature rise in a maximum 40 °C ambient. Provisions shall be provided for splicing additional sections onto either end of the MCC. C. The horizontal bus splice bars shall be pre-assembled onto the horizontal bus to allow the installation of additional sections. The main bus splice shall use four bolts, two on each side of the splice bars, for each phase. Additional bolts must not be required when splicing higher amperage bus. The splice bolts shall secure to captive nuts installed on the back of the splice assembly. It shall be possible to maintain any bus connection with a single tool. D. Each section that accepts plug-on units shall be provided with a vertical bus for distributing power from the main horizontal bus to the individual plug-on units. The vertical bus shall be of copper with the same plating as the main horizontal bus, and shall be rated 300 A or 600 A continuous. The vertical bus shall be connected directly to the horizontal bus stack without the use of risers or other intervening connectors. It shall be possible to maintain the vertical to horizontal bus connection with a single tool. "Nut and bolt" bus connections to the power bus shall not be permitted. When a back-to-back unit arrangement is utilized, separate vertical bus shall be provided for both the front and rear units. E. A tin-plated copper ground bus shall be provided that spans the entire width of the MCC. The ground bus shall be 0.25 in (6.0 mm) x 1.0 in (25 mm). A mechanical set screw lug shall be provided in the MCC for a 4/0-250 kcmil ground cable. The ground bus shall be provided with (6) 0.413 in. (10 mm) holes for each vertical section to accept customer-supplied ground lugs for any loads requiring a ground conductor. F. Each vertical section shall have a bare steel or tin-plated copper vertical ground bus that is connected to the horizontal ground bus. This vertical ground bus shall be installed so that the plug-on units engage the ground bus before engagement of the power stabs and shall disengage only after the power stabs are disconnected upon removal of the plug-on unit. G. The power bus system shall be braced for a short circuit capacity of 42,000 rms amperes minimum as standard. Bus bracing rated at 65,000, 85,000 and 100,000 rms amperes shall be available. Typical Unit Construction 11/03 A. Units with circuit breaker disconnects through 400 A frame, and fusible switch disconnects through 400 A, shall connect to the vertical bus through a spring-reinforced stab-on connector. Units with larger disconnects shall be connected directly to the main horizontal bus with appropriately sized cable or riser bus. B. All conducting parts on the line side of the unit disconnect shall be shrouded by a suitable insulating material to minimize the possibility of accidental contact with those parts. C. Unit mounting shelves shall include hanger brackets to support the unit weight during installation and removal. All plug-on units shall use a twin-handle cam lever located at the top of the unit to rack in and out the plug-on unit. The cam lever shall work in conjunction with the hanger brackets to ensure positive stab alignment. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 169 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Components D. A cast metal handle operator must be provided on each disconnect. With the unit stabs engaged into the vertical phase bus and the unit door closed, the handle mechanism shall allow complete ON/OFF control of the unit disconnect and provide clear indication of the disconnect’s status. All circuit breaker operators shall include a separate TRIPPED position to clearly indicate a circuit breaker trip condition. It shall be possible to reset a tripped circuit breaker without opening the control unit door. E. A mechanical interlock shall prevent the operator from opening the unit door when the disconnect is in the ON position. Another mechanical interlock shall prevent the operator from placing the disconnect in the ON position while the unit door is open. It shall be possible for authorized personnel to defeat these interlocks. F. A non-defeatable interlock shall be provided to prevent installing or removing a plug-on unit unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. G. The plug-on unit shall have a grounded stab-on connector which engages the vertical ground bus before, and releases after, the power bus stab-on connectors. H. Provisions shall be provided for locking all disconnects in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. I. Handle mechanisms shall be located on the left side to encourage operators to stand to the left of the unit being switched. J. Unit construction shall combine with the vertical wireway isolation barrier to provide a fully compartmentalized design. Components A. Combination Starters 1. All combination starters shall use a unit disconnect as previously specified. Square D brand Type S magnetic starters shall be furnished in all combination starter units. All starters shall utilize NEMA/EEMAC rated contactors. Starters shall be provided with a three-pole, external manual reset, overload relay for [eutectic melting alloy] [ambient compensated bimetallic] [solid state] overload relay units. 2. When provided, control power transformers shall include two primary fuses and one secondary fuse (in the non-ground secondary conductor). The transformer shall be sized to adequately power the contactor(s) and all connected control circuit loads. The transformer VA rating shall be fully visible from the front when the unit door is opened. 3. When a unit control circuit transformer is not provided, the disconnect shall include an electrical interlock for disconnection of externally powered control circuits. 4. Auxiliary control circuit interlocks shall be provided where indicated. Auxiliary interlocks shall be field convertible to normally open or normally closed operation. 5. NEMA/EEMAC Size 1–4 starters shall be mounted directly adjacent to the wireway so that power wiring (motor leads) shall connect directly to the starter terminals without the use of interposing terminals. Larger starters shall be arranged so that power wiring may exit through the bottom of the starter cubical without entering the vertical wireway. B. Control Terminal Blocks 1. When Type B wiring is specified, all starter units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks. 2. Control terminal blocks shall be the pull-apart type rated 600 volts and 25 amps. All current carrying parts shall be tin plated. Terminals shall be accessible from inside the unit when the unit door is opened. Terminal blocks shall be DIN rail mounted with the stationary portion of the block secured to the unit bottom plate. The stationary portion shall be used for factory connections, and shall remain attached to the unit when removed. The terminals used for field connections shall face forward so they can be wired without removing the unit or any of its components. 170 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Six-Inch Unit Construction 3. Typical Specifications When Type C wiring is specified, all starter units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks as described for Type B wiring along with power terminal blocks for size 1–3 units. An additional set of terminal blocks shall be provided in a terminal compartment located in each section. These terminal blocks shall be pre-wired to the unit terminals so that all field control connections can be made at the terminal compartments. C. Nameplates Shall be engraved phenolic nameplates for each MCC and unit compartment. Shall be gray background with white letters, measuring a minimum of 1.5 in (38 mm) H x 6.25 in (159 mm) W total outside dimensions. D. Pilot Device Panel Each combination starter unit shall be provided with a hinged/removable control station plate, which can accommodate up to five 22 mm pilot devices or three 30 mm pilot devices. [The control station plate can be deleted if no local unit pilot devices are required.] Six-Inch Unit Construction 11/03 A. Units with circuit breaker disconnects through 100 A frame, and fusible switch disconnects through 100 A, shall connect to the vertical through a spring-reinforced stab-on connector. Stabs on all plug-on units shall be cable connected to the unit disconnect. Six-Inch fusible units shall accept Class J fuses only and to be rated for 100,000 AIR (amperes interrupting rating) at 600 volts. Six-Inch units with circuit breakers shall be rated for 65,000 AIR at 480 volts. B. All conducting parts on the line side of the unit disconnect shall be shrouded by a suitable insulating material. C. Unit mounting shelves shall include hanger brackets to support the unit weight during installation and removal. All six-inch plug-on units shall be installable without the assistance of a camming device. D. A cast metal handle operator must be provided on each disconnect. With the unit stabs engaged into the vertical phase bus and the unit door closed, the handle mechanism shall allow complete ON/OFF control of the unit disconnect and provide clear indication of the disconnect’s status. All circuit breaker operators shall include a separate TRIPPED position to clearly indicate a circuit breaker trip condition. It shall be possible to reset a tripped circuit breaker without opening the control unit door. 1. A mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from opening the unit door when the disconnect is in the ON position. Another mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from placing the disconnect in the ON position while the door is open. It shall be possible for authorized personnel to defeat these interlocks. 2. A non-defeatable interlock shall be provided to prevent installing or removing a plug-on unit unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. The plug-on unit shall have a grounded stab-on connector which engages the vertical ground bus before, and releases after, the power bus stab-on connectors. E. Provisions shall be made for locking all disconnects in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. F. Handle mechanisms shall be located on the bottom left side of the unit and operate horizontally to encourage operators to stand to the left of the unit being switched. G. Unit construction shall combine with the vertical wireway isolation barrier to provide a fullycompartmentalized design. H. A maximum of 12 six-inch units shall be installed per vertical section without placement restrictions in new or existing applications. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 171 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Components for Six-Inch Units Components for Six-Inch Units Six-Inch Combination Starters 1. All six-inch combination starters shall use a unit disconnect as specified in the previous article. [NEMA/EEMAC rated units shall use Square D Company Type S magnetic starters] [Application-rated units shall use TeSys D-Line magnetic starters] and shall be furnished in all six-inch combination starter units. All starters shall use [NEMA/EEMAC] [IEC]-rated contactors. Starter units shall be provided with a 3-pole, external manual reset, overload relay for [eutectic melting alloy (NEMA/EEMAC rated units only)] [solid state (NEMA/EEMAC rated units only)] [ambient compensated bimetallic (application-rated units)] motor overload relay protection. 2. When provided, control power transformers shall include two primary fuses and one secondary fuse (in the ungrounded secondary conductor.) The transformer shall be sized to adequately power the contactor(s) and all connected control circuit loads. 3. When a unit control circuit transformer is not provided, the disconnect shall include an electrical interlock for disconnection of externally powered control circuits. 4. Auxiliary control circuit interlocks shall be provided where indicated. For NEMA/EEMAC rated starters, auxiliary interlocks shall be field convertible to normally open or normally closed operation. 5. NEMA/EEMAC Size 1 starters shall be mounted directly adjacent to the wireway so that power wiring (motor leads) will connect directly to the starter terminals. Terminal Blocks for Six-Inch Units 1. All starter units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks. 2. Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type, rated 250 volts and 10 amperes. All current-carrying parts shall be tin-plated. Terminals shall be accessible from the front of the unit when the unit door is opened. The stationary portion of the terminal block shall be used for factory connections and will remain attached to the unit when the portion used for field connections is removed. The terminals used for field connections shall be accessible so they can be wired without removing the unit or any of its components. Nameplates Engraved phenolic nameplates shall be provided for each MCC and unit compartment. Each nameplate shall have a gray background, white lettering, and measure a minimum of 1.5 in H x 6.25 in W (38 mm H x 150 mm W) total outside dimensions. Pilot Device Control Panel Each unit to be provided with a removable control station plate, which can accommodate up to four 22 mm pilot devices. [The control station plate can be deleted if no local unit pilot devices are required.] 172 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Quality Control Typical Specifications Quality Control The entire MCC shall go through a quality inspection before shipment. This inspection will include: Physical Inspection of: a. Structure b. Electrical conductors, including: 1) bussing 2) general wiring 3) units Electrical Tests a. General electrical tests include: 1) power circuit phasing 2) control circuit wiring 3) instrument transformers 4) meters 5) ground fault system 6) device electrical operation b. AC dielectric tests shall be made of: power circuit Markings/Labels, which include: a. instructional type b. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)/Canadian Standards Association (CSA) c. inspector’s stamps The manufacturer shall use integral quality control checks throughout the manufacturing process to ensure that the MCC meets operating specifications. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 173 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Sample Specifications Section 16483-1 Motor Control Center Adjustable Frequency Drive Controller NOTE: These specifications are for Altivar® 58 TRX adjustable frequency drive controllers, herein referred to as AC inverters, to be mounted in Square D Motor Control Centers. The Motor Control Center specification Section 16443 must be used in conjunction with these specifications in order to specify a complete Motor Control Center. Application information directly affects the type and size of AC drive controller unit that will be quoted. Brackets [ ] are provided where such data should be included. Please contact your local Square D distributor or field sales representative for specification assistance regarding a particular application. The Adjustable Frequency Drive Controller specification should be included in Division 16, Electrical with the electrical distribution system. PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work a. This section provides specification requirements for AC inverter type adjustable frequency, variable speed drives packaged as a complete motor control center unit or herein identified as AC drive controller units for use with [NEMA A] [NEMA B] [NEMA C] [NEMA E] [Wound Rotor] design AC motors. b. The manufacturer of the AC drive controller unit shall furnish, field test, adjust, and certify all installed AC drive controller units for satisfactory operation. c. Any exceptions/deviations to this specification shall be indicated in writing and submitted with the quotation. 1.02 Submittals a. Submit with the delivery of the MCC an Installation and Maintenance Manual and one (1) copy of the manufacturer’s drawings per shipping block. 1.03 Regulatory Requirements a. ANSI/NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code. b. ANSI C84.1 — Voltages Tolerances for North America. c. CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91 — Industrial Control Equipment. d. IEC 60146.1 — Semiconductor Converters — General Requirements and Line Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic Requirements. e. IEC 60721 — Classification of Environmental Conditions. f. NEMA ICS 3, Part 1 — Motor Control Centers Not Rated More Than 600 Volts AC. g. NEMA Publication 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. h. UL 508 — UL Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. i. UL 508C — UL Standard for Safety for Power Conversion Equipment. j. UL 845 — UL Standard for Safety for Motor Control Centers. k. UL 50 — UL Standard for Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 1.04 Warranty a. The AC drive controller unit shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from date of shipment. 174 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Sample Specifications Typical Specifications 1.05 Quality Assurance a. The AC drive controller unit and all selected catalog options shall be UL Listed according to Motor Control Center Equipment Specification UL 845. A UL label shall be attached inside each AC drive controller unit as verification. b. The AC drive controller unit shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with NEMA and NEC standards, and shall be NOM and CSA certified. c. The AC inverter and motor control center shall be manufactured by one supplier in an ISO 9001 certified facility. d. Every AC inverter shall be tested with an actual AC induction motor, 100% loaded, and temperature cycled within an environment chamber at 40° C (104° F). Documentation shall be furnished to verify successful completion at the request of the engineer. e. The manufacturer of the AC drive controller unit shall have been specialized in the design and production of motor control center drive units for a period of at least 10 years. f. All factory supplied options shall be completely tested for successful operation before shipment. Documentation shall be furnished upon the request of the engineer. g. Units shall be manufacturer’s standard factory construction. Manufacturer’s catalog pages documenting MCC units to be supplied shall be submitted for approval. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers a. The AC drive controller unit shall be Square D Company Class 8998 Altivar® 58 TRX or prior approved equal. Substitutions must be submitted in writing three (3) weeks prior to the original bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the alternative manufacturer meets all aspects of the specifications herein. b. Additions to existing MCCs shall be the same as the original manufacturer. c. Alternate control techniques other than pulse-width modulation technology (PWM) are not acceptable. 2.02 General Description a. The AC inverter shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and voltage as defined in the following sections. b. The input power section shall utilize a 6-pulse bridge rectifier design [with line reactors for effective harmonic mitigation]. The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed DC voltage. This power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC line. c. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC voltage. This section shall utilize intelligent power modules (IPMs) as required by the current rating of the motor. 2.03 Construction a. The AC drive controller unit shall be a combination disconnect-drive motor control center style unit. The input [circuit breaker] [fusible switch] shall provide NEC required branch circuit protection. The [circuit breaker] [fusible switch] shall have an external operator. Wiring between the AC inverter and the disconnect shall not be disturbed when removing or installing the AC drive controller unit from the motor control center. b. Units should be of modular construction so that it is possible to readily interchange units of the same size without modifications to the MCC structure. c. Current-limiting power fuses or reactors (if supplied) shall be factory installed and wired ahead of the AC inverter input. d. All conducting parts on the line side of the unit disconnect shall be isolated to prevent accidental contact with those parts. e. AC drive controller units up to 50 hp variable torque shall be plug-on units which connect to the vertical bus through a spring-reinforced stab-on conductor. Units larger than 50 hp variable torque shall be connected directly to the main horizontal bus with appropriately size cable or riser bus. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 175 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications f. Sample Specifications All AC drive controller units shall be enclosed in a structure which contains a 12 in. (305 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top of each section, and a 6 in. (152 mm) high horizontal wireway at the bottom of each section. These wireways should be unobstructed the full width of the motor control center to allow room for power and control cable to connect between units in different sections. g. A full-depth vertical wireway shall be provided within motor control center sections containing AC drive controller units up to 50 hp variable torque. The vertical wireway shall connect both the top and bottom horizontal wireways, and shall be isolated from the AC drive controller unit interiors by a full height barrier. The vertical wireway shall be at least 4 in. (102 mm) wide with a separate hinged door. There should be a minimum of 4,000 cubic inches (65,548 cubic millimeters) of cabling space available. Access to the wireways shall not require opening control unit doors. AC drive controller units that require a full section are not required to have vertical wireways. h. All AC drive controller unit interior mounting panels shall be white for increased visibility. i. The motor control center structure shall include unit mounting shelves with hanger brackets to support AC drive controller units up to 50 hp variable torque during installation and removal. A twin handle cam lever shall be located at the top of AC drive controller units up to 50 hp variable torque to rack the unit in and out. j. A cast metal handle operator shall be provided on each AC drive controller unit disconnect. With the AC drive controller unit connected to the motor control center bus and the AC drive controller unit door closed, the handle mechanism shall allow complete on/off control of the unit disconnect, and provide clear indication of the disconnect’s status. All circuit breaker operators shall include a separate tripped position to clearly indicate a circuit breaker trip condition. It shall be possible to reset a tripped circuit breaker without opening the control unit door. 1. A mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from opening the AC drive controller unit door when the disconnect is in the on position. Another mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from placing the disconnect in the on position while the AC drive controller unit door is open. It shall be possible for authorized personnel to defeat these interlocks. 2. A non-defeatable interlock shall be provided to prevent installing or removing a plug-on AC drive controller unit unless the disconnect is in the off position. k. Provisions shall be provided for locking all disconnects in the off position with up to three padlocks. l. All plug-on AC drive controller units shall have a grounded stab-on connector which engages the vertical ground bus prior to, and releases after, the power bus stab-on connectors. m. Handle mechanisms shall be located on the left side to encourage operators to stand to the left of the unit being switched. n. Unit construction shall combine with the vertical wireway isolation barrier to provide a fully compartmentalized design. o. All AC drive controller units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks for use in terminating field wiring. Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type, rated 250 volts and 10 amperes. All currentcarrying parts shall be tin-plated. Terminals shall be accessible from inside the unit when the unit door is opened. The stationary portion of the terminal block shall be used for factory connections and will remain attached to the unit when the portion used for field connection is removed. The terminals used for field connections shall be accessible so they can be wired without removing the unit or any of its components. 2.04 Thermal Management a. The AC drive controller unit shall incorporate a self-contained air-based cooling system. Any air exhaust vents shall be louvered to help direct air flow away from personnel operating the AC drive controller unit. Any fans, ductwork, or filters shall be easily accessible for maintenance. b. The AC drive controller unit cooling system shall be sized to adequately cool the drive regardless of mounting location within the motor control center. The AC drive controller unit shall not be restricted to a specific location in the motor control center. 176 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Sample Specifications Typical Specifications c. An internal overtemperature trip shall be provided to detect cooling system failure or blockage. Upon occurrence of an overtemperature trip, the cooling system fans shall continue running to provide a rapid cool down. d. Power for the cooling system shall be provided internal to the AC drive controller unit by use of a control power transformer which includes two primary fuses and one secondary fuse (in the non-ground secondary conductor). 2.05 Motor Data a. The AC drive controller unit shall be sized to operate the following AC motor: 1. Motor horsepower: [1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5,10,15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75,100,125,150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500] 2. Motor full-load amperage: [_____] 3. Motor rpm: [500/600] [600/720] [750/900] [1000/1200] [1500/1800] [3000/3600] , 50/60 Hz 4. Motor voltage: [208, 230, 460] 5. Motor service factor: [1.0] [1.15] [1.25] 2.06 Application Data a. The AC drive controller unit shall be sized to operate [a Variable Torque] [a Constant Torque] [a Variable Torque, Low Noise] [a Constant Horsepower] [an Impact] load. b. The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 0.1 Hz to a maximum speed of 500 Hz. 2.07 Environmental Ratings a. The AC drive controller unit shall be designed for operation in a [NEMA Type 1] [NEMA Type 1 Gasketed] [NEMA Type 12] Motor Control Center enclosure specified elsewhere. The AC drive controller unit shall meet IEC 60664-1 and NEMA ICS 1 Annex A. b. The AC drive controller unit shall be designed to operate while mounted in a motor control center structure with an ambient temperature from 0 to +40° C (+32 to +104° F). c. The storage temperature range shall be –25 to +65° C (–13 to +149° F). d. The maximum relative humidity shall be 93% at 40° C (104° F), non-condensing. e. The AC drive controller unit shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3300 ft (1000 m). Derating factors shall be applied above 3300 ft (1000 m) for the drive unit and MCC. 2.08 Electrical Ratings a. The AC drive controller unit shall be designed to operate from an input voltage of [208] [240] [480] Vac +/-10%. b. The AC drive controller unit shall operate from an input voltage frequency range from 57 to 63 Hz. c. The displacement power factor shall not be less than 0.98 lagging under any speed or load condition. d. The efficiency of the AC inverter at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 97%. e. [The variable torque overtorque capacity shall be 110% for one minute.] [The constant torque overtorque capacity shall be 160% for one minute.] f. The output carrier frequency of the AC inverter shall be selectable between 0.5 and 16 kHz depending on inverter rating for low noise operation. g. The AC inverter will be able to develop rated motor torque at 0.5 Hz (60 Hz base) in a Sensorless Flux Vector mode using a standard induction motor without an encoder feedback signal. h. All AC drive controller unit feeder equipment including conductors, lugs, disconnects, contactors, and so forth shall be sized per NEC 430-2 for the AC drive input current rating. An impedance range corresponding to a 22,000 to 100,000 A fault availability level shall be assumed. An AC drive input current rating label shall be attached inside each enclosure to enable feeder sizing. 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 177 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Sample Specifications 2.09 Protection a. The AC drive controller unit shall be protected against fault currents up to and including 100,000 A rms symmetrical at 480 Vac and shall be UL 845 listed as verification. b. Upon power-on, the AC inverter shall automatically test for a valid operation of memory, option module, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, DC to DC power supply, control power, and the pre-charge circuit. c. The AC drive controller unit shall be protected against short circuits between output phases, between output phases and ground, on the internal power supplies, and on the logic and analog outputs. d. The AC drive controller unit shall have a minimum AC undervoltage power loss ride-through of 200 milliseconds (12 cycles). The AC inverter shall have the user-defined option of frequency fold-back to increase the duration of the power-loss ride-through. e. The AC inverter will have a selectable ride through function which will allow the logic to maintain control for a minimum of one second (60 cycles) without faulting. f. For a fault condition (other than ground fault, short circuit, or internal fault), an auto restart function shall provide up to six restart attempts. The time delay before restart attempts shall be 30 seconds. g. The deceleration mode of the AC inverter shall be programmable. The stop modes shall include freewheel stop, fast stop, and DC injection braking. h. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC inverter shall be programmable to fault or operate at the user-defined low speed setting. i. The AC inverter shall have solid-state I2t protection that is UL Listed, meets UL 508C as a Class 10 overload protection, and meets IEC 60947. The minimum adjustment range shall be from 0.45% to 1.05% of the nominal current rating of the AC drive controller unit. j. The AC inverter shall have a programmable skip frequency with a bandwidth of 2.5 Hz. k. The AC inverter shall have a programmable fold-back function that will anticipate drive overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition. l. The output frequency shall be software enabled to foldback when the motor is overloaded. 2.10 Adjustments and Configurations a. The AC inverter motor and control parameters will be factory preset to operate most common applications. Necessary adjustments for factory-supplied unit operator controls and sequencing shall be pre-programmed and tested by the manufacturer. b. A choice of two types of acceleration and deceleration ramps will be available in the AC inverter software, linear or S-curve. c. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.05 to 999.9 seconds. d. The volts/frequency ratios shall be user selectable to meet variable torque loads for normal and high-torque machine applications. e. The memory shall retain and record the last fault for operator review. f. The software shall have an Energy Economy (no load) function that will reduce the voltage to the motor when selected for variable torque loads. A constant volts/hertz ratio will be maintained during acceleration. The output voltage will then automatically adjust to meet the torque requirement of the load. g. The AC inverter shall have an output signal with a user-selectable threshold that can be used to signal motor overtemperature before a motor overload fault. h. The AC inverter shall offer programmable DC injection braking that will brake the AC motor by injecting DC current and creating a stationary magnetic pole in the stator. 178 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Sample Specifications Typical Specifications 2.11 Operator Interface a. The operator interface terminal will offer the modification of AC inverter adjustments via a touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration parameters, I/O assignments, application and activity function access, faults, local control, and adjustment storage will be in plain English. There will be a standard selection of four additional languages built-in to the operating software as standard. b. As a minimum, the selectable display outputs shall consist of speed reference, output frequency, output current, line voltage, output power, energy consumed, run time, motor thermal state, drive thermal state, and motor speed. c. A keypad scrolling function shall allow dynamic switching between display variables. d. A programmable access code will limit access to programmable functions. A hardware selector switch shall allow the terminal keypad to be locked out from unauthorized personnel. e. The keypad shall store in non-volatile memory up to four user configuration parameters. An operator shall have the ability to download a stored configuration to multiple AC inverters. f. There will be arrow keys that will provide the ability to scroll through menus and screens, select or activate functions, or change the value of a selected parameter. g. A data entry key will allow the user to confirm a selected menu, numeric value, or allow selection between multiple choices. h. A RUN key and a STOP key will command normal starting and stopping as programmed when the AC drive controller unit is in keypad control mode. The STOP key must be active in all control modes. i. A user interface shall be available through a Windows-based personal computer, serial communication link, or detachable operator interface. j. The operator interface shall be MCC door mounted on the AC drive controller unit for ease of access and increased visibility. k. The keypad and all door-mounted controls shall be NEMA Type 12 rated. 2.12 Control a. External pilot devices shall be able to be mounted on a door-mounted control station for starting and stopping the AC drive controller unit, speed control, and displaying operating status. All control inputs and outputs shall be software assignable. Software assignments for control inputs and outputs to operate factory-supplied controls shall be pre-configured from the factory. b. Strategies for 2-wire or 3-wire control shall be defined within the software. c. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24 Vdc. d. The internal power supply incorporates an automatic current fold-back that protects the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs shall be current-limited and not be damaged if shorted or excess current is pulled. e. All logic connections shall be furnished on pull-apart terminal strips. f. There shall be two software-assignable, isolated analog inputs. One analog input shall be softwareselectable and consist of the following configurations: 0 to 20 mAdc, 4 to 20 mAdc, 20 to 4 mAdc, x to 20 mAdc (where x is user-defined). The other analog input shall be 0 to 10 Vdc. g. There shall be four isolated logic inputs, three that shall be selected and assigned in the software. h. Two voltage-free Form C relay output contacts shall be provided. One of the contacts shall indicate AC inverter fault status; the other contact shall be user-assignable. i. 11/03 There shall be one software-assignable analog current output configurable between x and y mADC (where x and y are user defined from 0 to 20 mADC). The analog output shall be updated every 2ms maximum. © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 179 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Typical Specifications Sample Specifications 2.13 Optional General Purpose Input/Output Extension j. There shall be a general-purpose hardware extension module incorporated with each AC drive controller. The module shall be fully isolated and have pull-apart terminal strips. The module shall add three analog outputs and one Form C relay output. All of the analog outputs shall be userassignable. Additional loss of follower functionality shall include the ability to run at the last valid speed reference or a selectable preset speed. 2.14 Optional Isolation/Bypass Contactors a. The AC drive controller unit shall include a UL Listed option [NEMA rated isolation and bypass contactors packaged as a separate MCC unit with steel barriers segregating the AC inverter from the bypass starter] [IEC rated isolation and bypass contactors integrated with the AC inverter as one MCC unit to reduce space] complete with thermal overload relay, disconnect interlocked with the door, control circuit transformer, motor flux decay timer, and an AFC/OFF/BYPASS switch. The operator shall have full control of the bypass starter by operation of the door-mounted selector switch. 2.15 Harmonic Analysis NOTE: The amount of harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling (PCC) is due to the distribution system characteristics (impedance of the source) and the power source size relative to the AC drive load. The harmonic current magnitude and voltage distortion values can be predicted through computer modeling. If the resulting calculations determine that the harmonic distortion will be above the IEEE-519 specification of 5%, a line reactor can be supplied to lower the harmonic levels. The line reactor is mounted at the AC drive input to reduce the current harmonics that are fed back into the supply. a. A harmonic analysis shall be performed and priced as a separate line item by the AC drive controller unit manufacturer based upon system documentation consisting of, but not limited to, one-line diagrams and specific distribution transformer information consisting of kVA, %Z, and X/R data. The data shall consist of but not be limited to total harmonic voltage distortion and total rms current. b. The line reactor, if required, shall be provided as a separate, ventilated [NEMA Type 1 Gasketed] [NEMA Type 1] MCC unit completely factory wired and tested with the AC drive controller unit. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection a. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated. b. Do not install the AC drive controller unit until the building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer. 3.02 Protection a. Before and during the installation, the AC drive controller unit shall be protected from site contaminants. 3.03 Installation a. Installation shall be in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions, drawings, and recommendations. b. The AC drive controller unit manufacturer shall provide a factory-certified technical representative to supervise the contractor’s installation, testing, and start-up of the AC drive controller unit(s) furnished under this specification for a maximum total of [_____] days. 3.04 Training An on-site training course of [_____] training days shall be provided by a representative of the AC drive controller unit manufacturer to plant and/or maintenance personnel, and quoted as a separate line item. 180 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Index bus duct connection 17 A AC Drives 66 Altistart® 46 soft start units 79 Altistart control circuit variations 88 control options 89 power options 88 standard duty soft starts 85 bus shutters 16 bussing 15 C circuit breaker branch feeder units 34 circuit breaker options 58 Class 1 11 Class 2 11 altitude ratings 12 combination starter units 36 Altivar® 58 AC drives 66 Compac 6 units 37 Altivar 58 TRX AC drive options 71 AC drives 69 basic drive power circuit 71 factory options 70 MCC package features 69 miscellaneous options 75 monitoring and indication 70 pilot devices 75 power contactor options 74 space requirements 72 wiring diagrams 77 control and timing relays 76 Altivar AC drives 66 D ambient compensated bimetal overload relay 55 control circuit variations 51 control power transformer 51 corner sections 16 cover plates 64 crimp lugs 60 CSA (Canadian Standards Association) 11 current limiting module 58 current transformer (CT) 30 custom wire labels 60 ambient compensated bitmetallic overload 107 dimensions 153 ammeter 30 distribution panelboards 62 analog meter 26 distribution transformers 61 application-rated Compac 6 units full voltage non-reversing starters 37 full voltage reversing 47 full voltage reversing starters 39 non-reversing 46 drip hood 16 automatic transfer switches 91 auxiliary electrical interlocks 58 dust boots 52 dynamic braking resistors 75 E EEMAC (Electrical, Electronic Manufacturers’ Association of Canada) 11 B elapsed time meter 30 back-to-back section 16 empty mounting units 64 basic unit extenders 76 Enclosure Types 12 bottom plate 16 Ethernet hubs 28 branch feeder units 34 exterior color 16 bus bracing 111 extra-high interrupting circuit breaker 58 11/03 electronic trip circuit breaker 58 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 183 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Index isolated alarm contact 55 F factory-installed thermal units 55 K fluorescent light 16 key interlock 58 four-position selector switch 52 L four-wire examples 24 full voltage 2-speed 1-winding starters (consequent pole) 41, 49 layout instructions 117 full voltage 2-speed 2-winding starters (separate winding) 42, 49 line reactors 75 full voltage 2-speed reversing starters 42, 49 full voltage non-reversing starters 36 full voltage reversing starters 38, 46 LED pilot lights 54 lug ranges 22 M full voltage reversing vacuum starters 37, 47 main bus 15 fusible switch branch feeder units 35 main circuit breakers 20 fusible switch options 59 main fusible switches 21 FVNR starter units 36, 45 starters 36 main lug compartments 19 FVR starter unit 46 starters 38 melting alloy overload relay 55 G model 4 transition section 18 GFI receptacle 16 Motor Logic Plus™ solid state overload relay 57 ground bus 15 Motor Logic® solid state overload relay 55, 56 master terminal compartment 64 melting alloy overload 101, 104 metering options 30 miscellaneous units 61 Motor Control Center Heat Dissipation 13 ground detection lights 30 ground fault options 59 N H NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association) 11 hand-off-auto selector 75 NEMA 1 Gasketed (NEMA 1A) 12 heat dissipation 13 NEMA 12 12 high interrupting circuit breaker 58 NEMA 3R 12 horizontal bus 10 NEMA/EEMAC 1 enclosure 154 NEMA 1 12 NEMA/EEMAC 1 gasketed enclosure 154 I NEMA/EEMAC 12 enclosure 154 I-Line busway 17 NEMA/EEMAC 3R enclosure 155 IMA TVSS 33 NEMA/EEMAC enclosures 12, 15 integrated equipment rating 111 NEMA/EEMAC Wiring 11 interrupt rating 111 NEMA/EEMAC wiring classes and types 11 neutral bus, solid 23 184 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Index O S one percent meter 30 selector switch 52 operating mechanism interlock 51 self-certified rating 112 option cards 75 separate control 51 overload alarm light 55 series rating 111 overload relays 55 service entrance label 25 P shipping weights 12 short circuit current rating 111 pilot devices 52 soft start units 79 pilot lights 53, 75 solid state overload relay 55–57 pilot lights, LED 54 specifications 167 potential transformer (PT) 30 splice bar 15 power factor correction capacitors 65 splice bars 10 power terminal blocks 60 steel gauge 13 PowerLogic® 25 circuit monitor 25 ethernet gateways 28 power meter 26 strip heater 16 Product Description 9 surge counter 33 programmable logic controllers 94 switchboard transition 17 structure 15 structure options 16 submittal drawing cover sheet 119 pull box 16 push button 52 pushbuttons 75 push-to-test LED pilot lights 54 push-to-test pilot lights 53 T thermal overload units 101 thermal-magnetic circuit breaker 58 transient suppression module 51 Q Transparent Ready options 29 quarter-turn fasteners 10 Type B 11 quick finder for conduit entry drawings 153 Type B-D 11 R Type A 11 Type B-T 11 Type C 11 rear doors 16 type K pilot devices 52–54 reduced voltage 2-step part-winding starters 41 type XB5 22mm LED pilot devices 54 reduced voltage autotransformer starters 40 type XB5 22mm pilot devices 53 relay section 64 ring tongue terminals 60 U rodent barriers 16 UL Listed 11 RVAT starters 40, 48 UL Listed rating 112 RVPW starters 41, 48 unit nameplates 51 unit options 51 11/03 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 185 Model 6 Motor Control Centers Index V W variable frequency drives 66 wire labels 60 vertical bus 15 wiring diagrams 119 vertical ground bus 10, 15 wiring options 60 withstand rating 111 wye-delta closed transition starters 43, 50 wye-delta open transition starters 44, 50 186 © 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/03 Schneider Electric 1990 Sandifer Blvd. Seneca, SC 29678 1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733) www.SquareD.com Schneider Canada Inc. 19 Waterman Avenue, M4B 1 Y2 Toronto, Ontario 1-800-565-6699 www.schneider-electric.ca Catalog No. 8998CT9701R7/02 November 2003 © 1997–2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Replaces 8998CT9701 dated 12/97.

Model 6 Motor Control Centers - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

Related documents

Products

Support

Model 6 Motor Control Centers - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib